

















Xj 


>- W 


> ^ C ^<\. d- “7 


o n o } f 





■ft 
-y 

> K o » ' ^ % *• ^ '* l O, ' 

^ ^ s *p 

f*\ ° ">> ^ *» \ ^ ^ * 

^ ^ ^W, <y ^ • 

*•'- " 

*>* V ^ * ^P 1 

°0 •'- > 

v ; N \ > / ; V * v 

A° V s ILL?* V *'*<>, "> 81 ' s'” /* 

'V * JvMfalk '* <* -v, **„&.».•- .A A^ A JSK.-S’^"' * 


N G 







X 0o x. 




V 


7 



^ < 


V . ® v v 

> </> 


v ° W¥ >, , v>-^ 

<>\ -> ^£#<§ 1 ^ » A V, V' * 

<>%. ft ^ ^ Y* v A -^vy, 

%. y 0 * X * a 6 <f * / ' iy ‘ s % A 

8 * o. - 0 ^ c 0 N c * <*> * * A x * V 1 8 * 

> * ' fL» .A -r 

' A v* 




/ \ V^'W* ~ 

t> c> -i. ^ 



■%. 


j^5»jgr <» 

/ 1 Jr 



jj'^ ^ r 

,A ,0 

0 A > 

7 9 


A'o 

w : 

% 

A 

A * 
% S » 

tp z 

</>- o 


\ 0o x. 



%> y 0 * X * aO 

, oV 


OC o 


O 0 

.... ^^ © A X± 

^SSs^ N \ v rf- 

^ ^ V c*v *. 



<* Xt. - ^ . ( 53 . & * 

* <- \V ^ 


I r^-* ^ 

> -^y v 

^ // V 

N c * ^ * * s A x « v 1 * 

A *<> -A U 





«• 

y 0 <, X *.- 

% <?-> r 0^ c 0 N c * -V 

% ° 0 *^Vwv'„ ^ .v 




A no^ 1 °o r° «• 0 ♦ 

a\ •*• te/uTp^ < ° 0 * c^n-. . <*• 



• a °' v\-., 

'(}. A A %$ 


///U ~ V V ~ ~ ’V 

W « W *+ * WWW + v> % : 

P * ^ ^ ^ V #vv oV <* % _ , 

' A sl'JL? ■> ' °o o 0 ' M ‘ 






I A’.w-V^ % 

*’*' W‘- **w , 

o* fjmfe \ .„ x ' ^ , 

.* .* * * 0 °- *1 
0 y N M' S ~’ * > «N W * W^UW*”* ^0 Oj ^ 

'©*. ^OHO 1 *>- * » , ' ° 4 0 s * * 

* ^ \> ^ • A 0 V v " *“ ° 

I ' ^ ,^ v * 0 v* 

^ - > _ ^mwa * v_ z 


® ^ <v- 

c »> > 

W£L \JY ** y, v *?' o 

*\ ,0«c t "*'♦*' A 


;> -rv-jq 

'' \ A ,, 

W * v B * 
































On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and 
the terrifying whoops of the Indians ” 


PIONEER SCOUT SERIES 

SCOUTING WITH 
DANIEL BOONE 

BY 

EVERETT T. TOMLINSON 



Illustrated by 
NORMAN ROCKWELL 


GARDEN CITY NEW YORK 

DOUBLEDAY, PAGE & COMPANY 
1914 


Cor'l'^ & 








Copyright , 191b by 
The Boy Scouts of America 
For Boys 9 Life 

Copyright , 191 b &?/ 

Everett T. Tomlinson 

All rights reserved, including that of 
translation into foreign languages , 
including the Scandinavian 


©CI.A38705,! ' 



OCT 15 1914 


Preface 

P ERHAPS not unnaturally in certain de- 
tails there is a slight confusion or diver- 
gence in the various works that recount 
the heroic deeds of Daniel Boone. The men of 
that day were making history rather than recording 
what they did. There is, however, a striking 
uniformity in all the records as to the simple faith 
and almost fatalistic conviction of Daniel Boone 
that he was called to be a pathfinder for the new 
nation in America. His courage, reverence, rugged 
honesty, and unselfishness, his childlike simplicity 
that was mixed with a certain shrewdness, at least 
in his dealings with the Indians, are, however, 
qualities in which the historians mostly agree. 

I have cast this record into story form and have 
used the license of a story-teller. I have incor- 
porated a few adventures on the border which 
strictly do not belong to this tale. Every one of 
them, however, is true, and I hope will help in 
giving a true picture of those early and trying days. 

In the midst of it all I have placed the great 
scout. The qualities he displayed are the same 
[v] 


PREFACE 


that are necessary for success in our day or any 
day. The problems may vary from generation 
to generation, but the elements of true manhood 
are ever the same. 

I have made free use of the many historical works 
which portray the character of the great scout. 

First of all is the diary of Daniel Boone him- 
self. In addition to that fascinating story, the 
following works also should be read by those who 
are interested in his life : 

“The Adventures of Colonel Daniel Boone,” by 
General Filson; 

“Life of Boone,” by Timothy Flint; 

“Daniel Boone and the Hunters of Kentucky,” 
by W. H. Bogart; 

“Daniel Boone, the Pioneer of Kentucky,” by 
J. S. C. Abbott; 

“The Adventures of Daniel Boone, the Ken- 
tucky Rifleman,” by the author of “Uncle Philip’s 
Conversations”; 

“Four American Pioneers,” by Frances M. Perry 
and Katherine Beebe. 

The various publications of the Filson Club of 
Louisville, Kentucky, have also been helpful. 
“The Siege of Bryant’s Station,” by the President 
of the Club, Colonel Reuben Durrett, and “The 
Battle of Blue Licks,” by Colonel Bennett H. 
Young, are most interesting. 

[Vi] 


PREFACE 


McClung’s “Sketches of Western Adventure,” 
and Strickland’s “Pioneers of the West” have pro- 
vided many interesting details. The author also 
gratefully acknowledges the aid he has had from 
some of the lineal descendants of Boone himself. 

If English boys are eager to hear about the heroic 
adventures of King Arthur, Robin Hood, and other 
characters, in part at least legendary, why should 
not American boys be equally interested in the true 
stories of the rugged heroes of their own land? 

There never has been a time when the develop- 
ment of a true patriotism was more needed than it 
is to-day. Our perils and problems are not con- 
cerned with savages and wild beasts, but they may 
be no less dangerous than those which confronted 
our forefathers. How to meet them, what qualities 
ought to be strengthened in the life of an American 
boy, how best to inspire the younger generation 
with love and devotion for our country, are vital 
questions of the present. 

The author believes there is no better way of do- 
ing this than by interesting our boys in such heroic 
men as Daniel Boone. 

Everett T. Tomlinson. 

Elizabeth, New Jersey. 














♦ 






























I 


1 















Contents 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. ' In the Wilderness 3 

II. Hunter Sam . . . . ■ . . . 13 

III. The Hunt for Game 23 

IV. The Gobblers 33 

V. Peleg’s New Place 42 

VI. Schoolmaster Hargrave .... 51 

VII. Two Scouts 61 

VIII. Peleg’s Encounter 72 

IX. At the Springs .80 

X. A Terrified Band 90 

XI. The Adventure of the School- 
master 100 

XII. An Attack 110 

XIII. The White Shawnee . . . . '. 121 

XIV. The Hidden Canoe 131 

XV. Gathering Clouds 141 

XVI. Captives 151 

XVII. The Pursuit 161 

XVIII. A Band of Scouts 171 

XIX. The Capture 181 

[ix] 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 

XX. An Offer of Release 

XXI. Flight 

XXII. The Coming of Blackfish . 
XXIII. Four Warriors and More . 
XXIV. A Decoy and an Attack 

XXV. A Field of Corn .... 

XXVI. The White Shawnee Again . 
XXVII. The Struggle in the Ravine 

XXVIII. At the Lower Blue Licks . 
XXIX. To the Meeting-Place . 
XXX. Conclusion 


[x] 


PAGE 

190 

200 

211 

223 

233 

242 

25 1 

260 

271 

282 

293 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


“ On the August air arose the reports of many rifles and 
the terrifying whoops of the Indians ” Frontispiece 

FACING PAGE 

“‘What is that?* At the question the two pioneer 
boys stopped abruptly ” 10 

“ He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with 
every indication of self-control, as well as of strength, 
stamped upon his face and form ” 28 

“The Indian had been able to draw his knife and 
struck at her again and again while the bear held 
him in one of her most fervent hugs’* .... 76 

“ Boone quickly rallied his startled followers and when 
the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready 
and awaiting their coming ” 116 

“ One of the men who had been stationed as a guard 
was shot early in the morning ” 126 

“The scout, with his family, returned to Boones- 
borough ” 220 

“ Silently the men crossed the ford ” 276 























































SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 



Scouting with Daniel Boone 


CHAPTER i 


IN THE WILDERNESS 

W HAT is that?” 

At the question the two pioneer boys 
stopped abruptly. From within the for- 
est they had heard the sound of a snapping branch. 
The sound itself had not been loud, but the quiet 
of that September day in 1773 had been sharply 
broken by the slight noise from the brush. For a 
brief time both boys listened intently and then one 
of them went back a short distance along the trail 
over which the little procession had advanced, 
carefully looking for signs of danger on either side. 

And there was need for caution. Under the 
leadership of Daniel Boone five families besides 
his own had been making their way slowly through 
the unbroken wilderness from the settlement on 
the Yadkin in North Carolina. At Powell’s Val- 
ley, through which they recently had passed, forty 
men had joined the little company, thereby adding 

[ 3 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

greatly to its strength, and increasing the confi- 
dence of the hardy settlers. 

As the little cavalcade spread out in a long line, 
an advance guard of five opened the way, while 
three rear guards, of two each at irregular intervals, 
were stationed to prevent surprises from the hostile 
Indians or attacks by the prowling beasts of prey 
that were wont to follow the trail of men in the 
wilderness. 

At this time the band was crossing Powell’s 
Mountain, and the extreme rear guard was made up 
of James, the oldest son of Daniel Boone, and his 
friend, Peleg Barnes, the latter being one of the 
number that had been added to the company when 
the settlers arrived at Powell’s Valley. Persuaded 
that no enemy was near, the two boys resumed 
their positions and proceeded on their way. 

Each boy was dressed in a hunting costume and 
wore leggings and fringed trousers made from the 
skin of the deer. Each also was armed with a rifle 
which he carried almost as naturally as if it was a 
part of himself. Powder-horns and bullet-pouches 
were swinging from their shoulders. It was mani- 
fest from the attitude and the manner of both 
young hunters that they were familiar with the 
ways of the wilderness and were alert to detect 
signs of the presence of friend or foe. 

“I don’t like that noise,” suggested Peleg in a 

[ 4 ] 


IN THE WILDERNESS 

low voice. “ ’Tis the second time we have heard 
it since we have been the rear guard to-day.” 

His companion smiled and did not reply, and for 
a time Peleg also remained silent. He was a rest- 
less, dark-haired, muscular, and well-grown boy, 
perhaps seventeen or eighteen years of age, which 
also was the age of his more quiet comrade. The 
boys were warm friends, but like many men of the 
earlier days, they were prone to silence, though 
little that occurred in the nearby forest escaped 
their attention. 

The wilderness through which they were ad- 
vancing was almost untrodden. Confidence and 
hope were expressed on the rugged faces of the 
boys, however, for they early had learned to live in 
the presence of continual danger from the prowling 
beasts and the hostile red men. 

‘‘I never knew a man just like your father,” 
suggested Peleg, at last breaking the silence. 

“Neither did I,” replied James Boone, with a 
smile that strongly lighted up his face, as he turned 
to his friend. 

“He never seems to think about himself. He is 
taking this expedition to the land he has found 
because he believes it to be for our advantage for 
him to do so.” 

“He knows it is.” 

“I heard him tell about the wonderful sky and 

[ 5 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


soil he had found there; and it must be worth while 
to go, else he would not be advising us to leave 
the Yadkin and cross all these mountains into the 
wilderness. I never saw such a strong man as your 
father is. I don’t believe he has an ounce of fat 
on his body. Is it true that he is having a record 
kept of the places he has found and the journeys 
he has made?” 

“It is.” 

“ I should like much to see it. I can read writing, 
and if some time you will ask him to grant me the 
privilege I shall want to read what he has had 
written ” 

Peleg stopped abruptly and grasped his com- 
panion’s arm, as both boys were startled once more 
by the sudden snapping of a branch apparently 
only a few yards to the left. Instantly both were 
listening breathlessly, and were holding their rifles 
in readiness, while they peered anxiously into the 
brush from which the threatening sound had come. 

“ I declare to you,” whispered Peleg, “that there 
is some one following us.” 

“Verily,” whispered James Boone, although he 
did not turn away his eyes from the forest as he 
spoke. 

The alarm of the two young guards was not un- 
natural, as has been said. On the lower slopes of 
the mountain great trees were growing, but as the 
[ 6 ] 


IN THE WILDERNESS 


band of emigrants had steadily climbed, the timber 
diminished, and even underbrush had become some- 
what thinned. Still, on every side of the trail there 
were sufficient bushes to hide the presence of an 
enemy that might be following the pioneers. Both 
boys knew that game of many kinds abounded in 
the wilderness. Many a time their skill had been 
tested long before they had left their homes on the 
Yadkin. 

That their perils would be increased as they with- 
drew into the region in which the foot of no white 
men except Daniel Boone and his comrade had ever 
trod they both were well aware. On this Septem- 
ber day the advancing settlers had been moving in 
a much longer and thinner line than had been 
adopted the preceding day. The difficulties of the 
ascent and the frequent great rocks in their way 
made their progress over the mountain more diffi- 
cult and different from the easier march through 
the valley on the opposite side. Only an occasional 
white man had been seen since they had left their 
homes, and there was constant fear of the red 
men, almost all of whom were exceedingly hostile 
at this time and very jealous in guarding their own 
domains from the incursions of the whites. 

Perhaps not unnaturally most of those who were 
in Boone’s party looked upon the Indian as a 
natural enemy. Few were mindful of the fact that 
[ 7 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the red men were but doing their utmost to defend 
their own homes and retain their hunting grounds 
from the trespassing whites, who, they were fearful, 
would soon push them from the region, unless by 
determined warfare the Shawnees and other neigh- 
bouring tribes might be able to prevent their en- 
trance and settlement. 

It was well known that the region into which 
Daniel Boone was leading his company on that 
September day was considered by the Indians to 
be the best of all their hunting grounds. There 
the buffalo and the deer abounded. Wild turkeys 
were so numerous that the report which Daniel 
Boone had brought scarcely had been credited by 
his friends. There were times in the autumn when 
great flocks of wild pigeons sweeping through the 
woods might be felled with a club by a man stand- 
ing in the way of their advance. It is true that 
where so much game was found dangerous ani- 
mals also abounded. The panther and bear were 
much in evidence, and prowling wolves often 
made the night hideous with their weird and ter- 
rifying howls. 

There was no one in the advancing company 
who did not fully understand what the cost of 
seeking and making a new home in the wilderness 
was likely to be. Doubtless some would fall vic- 
tims to the cunning of the hostile red men. Others 
[ 8 ] 


IN THE WILDERNESS 


were certain to lose their lives in attacks by the 
treacherous panther, the deadliest four-footed foe of 
the white men in the new world. 

When the two young pioneers, who formed the 
rear guard of the slowly moving procession, re- 
sumed their advance, both were silent for a time and 
keenly observant of the woods on either side of the 
trail left by those who had preceded them. In places 
the autumn foliage already was tinted with scarlet 
or gold. The soft air of the September day became 
slightly cooler as the party steadily approached the 
higher regions of Powell’s Mountain. 

In the midst of such surroundings it was impos- 
sible for the young hunters long to retain their 
anxiety, though neither ceased his keen watchful- 
ness. 

“ How old is your father? ” inquired Peleg at last. 

“About forty.” 

“I wish much to hear him tell of his adventures 
in this land which he says the Indian calls Kan- 
tuckee. Do you know what that word means?” 
“No.” 

“Do you think your father is fearful the redskins 
may attack us before we come to the Licks, where 
he affirms he will make our settlement?” 

“You must ask him,” replied young Boone. 
“I do not believe he thinks that we or any other 
band of settlers will ever build a home in such a 
[ 9 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

country as he has found without having to fight 
for it. Peleg, I have almost decided that one 
never gets anything worth having without having 
to fight some kind of a battle.” 

“That is surely so,” replied Peleg, laughing 
softly as he spoke. “I shall never forget how 
Schoolmaster Hargrave had to fight to teach me to 
use a quill. The letters somehow would not come, 
not even when he set his best copy for me. He 
told me one day that they looked like a whirlwind 
in distress. I was minded several times to give 
up the whole attempt, but he told me to fight on, 
and how I am glad that I did.” 

“I am told that the schoolmaster later expects 
to come where we are going.” 

“ So I have heard. I hope he will leave his 
ferrule behind. Whew! My knuckles ache now 
with the mention! Still lie seemed to get some 
pleasure out of it, but ” 

Peleg stopped suddenly as a faint cry was 
heard far in their rear. It was a sound not unlike 
that made by a child in distress. Weird, pathetic, 
startling as it was, neither of the boys was for a 
moment unaware of its meaning. It was the cry 
of a panther far in the distance. 

And panthers not infrequently hunted in pairs. 
It might be possible that two of the treacherous 
creatures had been following the slowly moving 
[ 10 ] 



‘ What is that? ’ At the question the two pioneer 
boys stopped abruptly ” 





































































































IN THE WILDERNESS 

caravan, for slow-moving it was indeed. The 
children and women were carried on the backs of 
the horses. The few heavy wagons were dragged 
with difficulty over the rough ground, and many a 
time the entire band was compelled to halt while 
the men felled a tree which blocked their advance. 

“ I tell you,” said Peleg in a whisper, “ that sound - 
we heard before was made by a painter.” 

“It may be true.” 

“Will you stay here while I go back over the 
trail a little way to see if I can find any signs of the 
varmints? It is yet too light for them to attack 
us, but I should like to know if there is a pair on our 
trail.” 

“Do not go far,” said James Boone hesitatingly. 

“You may be sure that I shall not be over- 
venturesome. I shall return directly.” 

In a moment Peleg disappeared from the sight 
of his companion as he lightly and yet swiftly sped 
back over the way by which they had come. 

Left alone, young Boone seated himself upon a 
fallen tree and awaited the return of his companion. 
Holding his rifle lightly in his hands after he had 
carefully looked to its priming, he was keenly 
observant of all about him. He had been dis- 
turbed more than he had acknowledged to Peleg by 
the sounds which they had heard. He had known 
of instances in which a panther had trailed a man 
[ 11 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

for many hours. The conjecture of Peleg that a 
pair of the hated beasts might be following the 
slowly moving settlers was not improbable. 

As the moments passed the anxiety of the young 
hunter for his companion increased. No sound 
to alarm him had broken in upon the silence, and 
yet somehow the son of the great pioneer scout was 
anxious for his friend. 

Rising from his seat he ran swiftly in the direc- 
tion in which Peleg had gone. In a few moments 
he discovered his friend standing beneath a spread- 
ing chestnut and holding his gun in such a manner 
that it was manifest that he had heard some sound 
to alarm him. A huge panther crouched upon the 
limb of the chestnut tree, almost directly above 
the place where Peleg was standing. 


[ 12 ] 


CHAPTER II 


HUNTER SAM 

I F THE vision of James Boone had not 
been trained, and unusually keen, the sight 
of the crouching animal would have escaped 
him. Its tawny skin was of a colour not unlike that 
of the tinged foliage of the branches of the chestnut 
upon which it was lying. There was an occasional 
nervous twitching of its tail, but otherwise it was 
as motionless as if it had been carved of marble. 

So intense was the interest of the savage beast 
in the young hunter directly beneath it that it was 
unaware of the approach of James Boone. Even 
as he perceived the animal, however, its muscles 
tightened, and it prepared for a leap upon the un- 
suspecting boy. 

Instantly bringing his rifle to his shoulder, and 
taking careful aim, James fired at the motionless 
target. He ignored the exclamation of the startled 
Peleg, who leaped to one side at the report of the 
rifle, and then, glancing at his friend, followed 
the direction of his gaze, and became aware of the 
peril above him. 


[ 13 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

For a moment the beast seemed to be unharmed. 
It remained in the same position, motionless, and 
with its head leaning below the limb to which it 
clung. 

Young Boone did not move from the place 
where he was standing, but instantly began to re- 
load his rifle, all the time keeping careful watch 
upon the movements of the beast. 

Suddenly the panther began to claw at the limb 
to which it had been clinging. It was manifest 
that its hold was broken or breaking. The long 
claws were driven savagely into the bark, but in 
spite of all its efforts the creature plainly was slip- 
ping. There were two or three snarls, and once it 
turned and snapped savagely at its side. The tail 
began to lash the branch, and then suddenly be- 
came motionless. 

Slowly the ability of the savage beast to main- 
tain itself was departing. A stream of red showed 
the effect which young Boone’s bullet had taken. 
He had aimed just a little back of the fore-shoulder, 
and it was difficult for him now to understand how 
even a panther, tenacious of life as the beast was 
known to be, was still able to cling to the branch. 

Struggling, snarling, the great beast turned and 
gradually but surely began to slip from its perch. 
For a moment it almost seemed that it would be 
able to maintain its grasp even after its body had 
[ 14 ] 


HUNTER SAM 


turned to the underside of the huge branch. But all 
at once, without a sound, the long body fell, striking 
hard upon the ground twenty feet or more below. 

Before the animal could show whether or not it 
was still alive, Peleg, who now had recovered from 
his first alarm, raised his rifle and fired at the pros- 
trate body. 

There was slight question now as to the approach- 
ing death of the savage beast. It lay almost mo- 
tionless on the ground, but there was still an occa- 
sional nervous twitching of its long tail. Both 
boys, however, were too skilled in the art of the 
hunter to venture within reach of the terrible claws 
until they were satisfied that the dreaded enemy 
was indeed dead. 

“There may be another,” said Peleg nervously, 
as he glanced into the woods after he had hastily 
reloaded his rifle. “That cry we heard probably 
was the call of this one’s mate.” 

“That may be so,” said young Boone. 

* ‘ What are you going t o do ? ” in quired Peleg in sur- 
prise, as he saw his companion place his rifle against 
a tree and draw his hunting-knife from his belt. 

“Iam going to skin this big cat.” 

“Do you think we ought to stop for that? ” asked 
Peleg. 

“Yes.” 

“Then let me help.” 

[ 15 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“No, you keep guard. Our gunsmayhave stirred 
up more trouble than we know.” 

Acting upon this suggestion, both boys became 
silent while young Boone began his task. 

Swiftly and deftly he slit the beautiful skin the 
length of the body, and then did likewise on each 
leg. So skilful was the young hunter that in a 
brief time he had drawn back the skin sufficiently 
to cause him to call to his companion, “Come here 
and help me.” 

Together the two boys then tore the skin from 
the body, and young Boone rolled the panther’s 
hide into a small, compact bundle. He tied this 
securely with a deerskin thong, and then added 
it to his burden. 

At once the boys began to run swiftly to regain 
the distance they had lost. They had not advanced 
far, however, before they saw some one approaching 
them on the trail. 

“ ’Tis as I thought,” said James Boone with a 
smile. “Our guns have ’roused our friends.” 

“That’s Sam Oliver.” 

“I see it is,” replied James. 

Neither of the boys spoke again as the man rapidly 
approached them. Both knew him as one of the 
hunters of the company, and as one whose labours 
chiefly were confined to that field. 

Sam was perhaps fifty years of age, tall, raw- 

[ 16 ] 


HUNTER SAM 


boned, sunburned, with an expression of face not 
unpleasing, and a frequent twinkle in his eyes. As 
for felling the trees or building the houses of logs, 
Sam was willing for others to assume those labours, 
and whatever honours might accrue from such tasks. 
For himself he much preferred to do his part by 
supplying the band with game. 

Frequently the two boys had gone with the trap- 
per when he had made the rounds of his traps, and 
in the warm days of summer nothing had delighted 
either more than to accompany him into the forest, 
where they were interested in the weird, and at 
times fantastic, tales Sam related of his personal 
adventures, and also of the characteristics of the 
denizens of the forest. 

“ What’s wrong, lads? ” inquired the hunter as he 
approached. 

“Nothing is wrong now,” laughed Peleg. “We 
shot a painter back here. And there is its hide,” he 
added as he pointed with pride to the bundle which 
was suspended from his companion’s shoulders. 

Glancing at the object to which his attention 
had been directed, Sam whistled and then said, 
“ Seen any more?” 

“No, sir.” 

“ Seen any signs o’ redskins?” 

“No, sir. Have you seen any? ” 

“That’s for the King to say,” replied the hunter, 
[ 17 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

laughing in apparent heartiness, though no sound 
escaped his lips. 

The expression, “that’s for the King to say,” 
was one that fell so frequently from the lips of 
Sam Oliver that both boys understood what he 
meant. It was his method of evading a direct 
reply to any question he did not wish to answer. 

“All of which means,” said James, “that you 
have seen some redskins.” 

“A few signs. Nothing very bad, and nothing 
that should be spoken of by either of you. In 
course we are bound to find the varmints following 
us, but I don’t think they will attack us if we are on 
our guard. We must do our best, and after that 
there is no good in trying to do anything more. 
Your father says everything that happens is right, 
or it wouldn’t be. Strange,” he added, as he again 
looked at the panther’s skin which James Boone 
was carrying, “strange that you should have 
got him so easy. I have known the time when it 
would have taken half-dozen bullets to put an end 
to a fighting painter.” 

“Have you shot a good many of them?” in- 
quired Peleg. 

“Oh, a few, a few,” replied the hunter. “The 
strangest sight I ever see was one time when I 
was followin’ three o’ the varmints. They led me 
a hard chase, and it was two days before I caught 
[IB] 


HUNTER SAM 

up with them, and when I did, I almost wished I 
had not.” 

“Why?” 

“I will tell you. When I came near a big open 
space there in the woods I heard the worst screechin’ 
I ever heard in my life. You simply cannot de- 
scribe it. They were snarlin’ and spittin’ and 
screamin’ and growlin’, and sometimes it seemed 
as if they were doin’ all four things at once. 
My first thought was that this was no place for 
Sam Oliver. It sounded like a hundred painters 
were fightin’ to the death. I reckon I did turn 
back a little way, but the screechin’ and the 
screamin’ kep’ up so that I finally decided that I 
must find out what was goin’ on.” 

“What was it?” inquired Peleg. 

“When I crep’ up close to the clearin’ and 
peeped out I saw two painters a-fightin’. They 
were crouchin’ on the ground facin’ each other 
and callin’ each other every name they could think 
of in painter language. I did not know what had 
happened to the third painter, but I knew I ought 
not to stay there long. But all at once the two 
varmints leaped at each other and a minute later 
they were in such a plight that you would not have 
known what kind of beasts they was. They had 
ripped and torn and clawed and scratched and bit 
each other until it did not seem as if what was left 
[ 19 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

could hang together. Then all at once one of them 
got the other fellow by the throat and it wasn’t 
long before he said good-bye.” 

“Did you shoot him? ” asked Peleg. 

“No, for just then I heard a noise right behind 
me and when I looked back I see the third painter 
creepin’ toward me and I fired at it and ran. 
Somehow I managed to get away, and next day I 
went back to the scene o’ battle but I could not 
find anythin’ there except the dead painter. The 
others had gone. I had been so long trailin’ them 
that I thought I wouldn’t follow any further. But 
if I live to be a hundred years old I shall never 
forget that there fight I saw between those two 
big cats! There are some animals,” continued the 
hunter, “ that seem to have reg’lar feuds, jest like 
fam’ly troubles. They may fight one another once 
in a while, but they will make up to fight the enemies 
of the fam’ly every time they get a chance.” 

“ What do you mean? ” asked Peleg. 

“W T ell, for instance, there’s the beaver and the 
otter. They seem to have had a declaration of 
war from the very beginnin’, same as cats and 
dogs. I see a beaver house one day las’ winter 
standin’ right in the middle o’ the pond which 
the beavers had made. You know they build a 
long tube right up through the centre o’ the floor 
which looks somethin’ like a chimney. The top 
[ 20 ] 


HUNTER SAM 


o’ this one was about four feet higher than the 
floor, and it was a good two feet through. The 
water round their house came almost to the top 
of the door. Mr. Beaver, when he wanted to go 
into his house, used to dive and come up through 
the tube, then he would shake himself, and slide 
down to his floor, which was always dry. It was 
always warm, too, for even in the coldest weather 
the water all round the house kep’ it from freezin’. 
I reckon this particular fam’ly was pretty well 
provided for because they were all fat. Leastwise 
they looked as if they might have been, though 
they were dead when I saw them.” 

“ How was that?” inquired Peleg. 

“Why, the otter had gone after them.” 

“Into their house?” 

“No! No! No otter would ever dare do that. 
In a fight in a place like that the beaver, which 
has such strong teeth and is such a strong little 
brute anyway, would have the advantage every 
time. The otter works in ’nother way. The 
beaver famTy had been busy all through the sum- 
mer hidin’ their strips o’ poplar and birch and wil- 
lows in the bottom o’ the lake which they had 
made. They intended to have their easy time in 
the winter, and they do, too, unless some otters 
happen along. 

“In this case I am tellin’ you about, a couple o’ 

[ 21 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

otters had tried to break into the house, but the 
walls was hard as granite. If the otter can only 
get the beaver into the water he can catch him 
easily, because the otter is as quick as a fish. So 
the beaver simply works on the defensive and 
builds a house strong enough to keep out any otter 
that may happen along. But pretty soon the 
otters begin to look into the beavers’ dam. By 
and by, when they find a weak spot, where they 
can work a hole straight through, they begin their 
•job. When the weather is not too cold and the 
ice not too thick, just as soon as the water in the 
lake begins to drop a little, then the beavers begin 
to hunt for the leak. But when the water falls 
fast and there is a covering of ice all over the lake 
and sometimes the ice caves in, you see the beavers 
then cannot get their provisions, and the inside o’ 
their houses is as cold as it is outside. 

“The otters have a reg’lar course they follow, 
goin’ from one place to ’nother and making their 
rounds ’bout every ten days to two weeks. I 
reckon in the case o’ this beaver fam’ly I am tellin’ 
you about that the otters came back in a fortnight 
or so and found the beavers all dead or in no shape 
to fight. Here comes Daniel Boone himself,” the 
hunter exclaimed suddenly, “and I reckon you 
boys will have to explain to him what you meant 
by your shots back yonder.” 

[ 22 ] 


CHAPTER III 


THE HUNT FOR GAME 



T THE words of the hunter the boys looked 


up and saw the scout approaching. He 


A. JL was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, 
in the prime of middle life, and with every indica- 
tion of self-control, as well as of strength, stamped 
upon his face and form. His expression showed 
that he was anxious concerning the shots which 
had been fired, but as he drew near the boys he 
was not the first to speak. Peleg’s admiration 
was manifest in the manner in which the young 
pioneer looked up to the great leader, though the 
boy, like others of his day and age, seldom spoke 
to his elders unless first they had spoken to him. 

In response to the question which was expressed 
in the eyes of Daniel Boone, rather than in words, 
Sam Oliver said quietly, “The boys shot a painter.” 

There was a slight smile on the face of Daniel 
Boone as he said, “Did they? Was it necessary?” 
he added, as he turned to his son. 

“Yes, sir,” replied young Boone. “The var- 
mint was just ready to spring on Peleg. He was 


[ 23 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

crouching on the branch of a tree directly over 
him, and if I had not fired he would have had 
him.” 

“It must be right. You know,” added Boone 
quietly, smiling again as he spoke, “I am one of 
those who believe that whatever happens is right.” 

“And yet,” suggested the hunter, “you don’t 
stop tryin’ for yourself, nor for others, either.” 

“Not at all,” answered the scout. “A man 
must follow the best light he can get and then, 
beyond that, where he cannot go, he must believe 
that things do not ‘happen.’ I have heard some 
men blame their ‘luck’ for what befell them. I 
have never thought there was any such thing as 
‘luck.’ The trouble is we do not always see the 
connection in events, and in our ignorance we say 
a thing ‘happens.’ I am sorry the boys had to 
shoot the painter.” 

“I never knew,” laughed the loquacious Sam, 
“that you had any sympathy to waste on those 
critters.” 

“I haven’t,” replied Daniel Boone, a trace of a 
smile again appearing on his face as he spoke. “I 
am not sorry that the painter was shot. I am 
sorry that the boys had to shoot it. Just now I 
am more afraid of their rifles than I am of painters.” 

The trio looked quickly into the face of the 
leader, but his quiet expression was unchanged, 
[ 24 ] 


THE HUNT FOR GAME 

and what he may have implied by his statement 
he did not explain. 

“I do not love the varmints,” said Sam, shaking 
his head. “I shall put them out of the world 
every chance I get.” 

“So shall I,” assented Boone, “although some- 
times I feel sorry that I have to do so. I do not 
suppose that a painter is following anything else 
than the instinct which was given him, the same 
as a hound dog follows the track of a rabbit.” 

“How about men?” inquired Sam. 

“I believe the same thing is true of men,” said 
Daniel Boone seriously. “Fortunately for me, I 
had a good father and a good mother, so that when 
I was a child I was kept free from many of the 
things which drive some people I have known into 
divers sorts of evil.” 

The little party was advancing steadily during 
this conversation, and apparently, now that the 
explanation of the two shots had been given, the 
leader was no longer apprehensive. To Peleg, 
however, who was watchful of the man’s every 
movement, it seemed as if he was continually lis- 
tening for sounds which the others were unable 
to hear. The boy was aware of the threatening 
peril from the Indians, although not once had a 
red man been seen since the emigrants had de- 
parted from Powell’s Valley. But the fact that 
[ 25 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the Shawnees kept themselves hidden from sight 
by no means proved that they might not be near. 
Frequently he and James Boone had talked over 
the possibility of an attack by their foes, but the 
presence of the additional forty men that had 
joined the expedition recently provided an added 
sense of security. They felt that it was doubtful 
if even a large band of warriors would venture to 
attack a party so well defended as was that now 
led by Daniel Boone. 

When the sun set the entire band halted and 
preparations were made for the night. The few 
wagons were drawn toward one spot and left with 
their rear ends turned toward the forest. An 
enclosure was formed in this way, in the centre 
of which a fire was kindled and preparations for 
supper were speedily made. Meat from the deer 
which had been shot the preceding day was roasted 
on spits turned by some of the younger children. 
Only a scanty supply of vegetables was to be had, 
and for the most part the hardy settlers were com- 
pelled to rely upon the supplies of game which the 
boys and Sam Oliver and other hunters had no 
difficulty in obtaining in the forest. 

Guards were assigned for the night, one man 
being stationed on each of the four sides of the 
camp and close to the encircling wagons. The dogs 
which accompanied the expedition were also used 
[ 26 ] 


THE HUNT FOR GAME 

as aids in detecting the presence of enemies, but 
throughout the night nothing more dangerous than 
a deer or a curious night-bird was heard. 

There were several young girls in the company 
whose duties consisted largely in looking after the 
younger children and in helping prepare the meals 
when the emigrants halted. There was an air of 
confidence in the bearing of almost all the members 
of the expedition, but Peleg Barnes was convinced 
that Daniel Boone himself was far from feeling at 
ease. The boy felt sure, of course, that the leader 
was anxious not for his own safety, but for those 
who were following him in their search for the 
wonderful land which he had found in Kantuckee. 

Before sunrise preparations for the resumption 
of the journey were completed, and after an ample 
breakfast, though the food did not differ materially 
from that of the preceding evening, the word to 
depart was given. 

The little children and many of the women rode 
on the backs of the horses, some of which were 
hauling the heavy wagons that contained the 
simple household possessions of the emigrants. 
As there were more horses than wagons, there was 
ample provision made for all who were unable to 
endure the hardships of the march. The sister of 
young Boone, however, frequently insisted upon 
walking with her brother, except when he was to 
[ 27 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

be one of the guards. No fresh excitement oc- 
curred and no fears were aroused until after the 
band had passed Walden’s Mountain. 

“ Cumberland Mountain is not far beyond,” said 
Sam to Peleg and young Boone when the nightly 
camp had been made after a second mountain had 
been crossed. “When once we get beyond that 
we shall soon see the land o’ promise. I think 
to-morrow I shall have to take you two boys with 
me and see if we cannot get some fresh venison. 
Our stores are runnin’ low, and a few pa’tridges 
or wild turkeys would not be bad, either, and I 
am sure we shall find plenty o’ both in the valley.” 

“There must be pigeons left from those we shot 
yesterday,” suggested Peleg. 

“There are some,” replied the hunter, who was 
in general charge of the larder, “but it would be a 
change for us if we could get a few turkeys. We 
ought to find some fish, too, in the stream in the 
valley, and I think I shall set some o’ the boys to 
catchin’ them. We shall go ahead o’ the main 
party to-morrow, or else let the band go ahead 
of us, so that if there happen to be any redskins 
on our trail they will not mistake us for the whole 
band.” 

“Have you seen any more signs?” inquired 
Peleg quickly. 

“Plenty o’ signs, but we have not seen one o’ 

[ 28 ] 



“He was a tall, lean man, quiet in his bearing, and with 
every indication of self-control, as well as of strength, 
stamped upon his face and form ” 






















THE HUNT FOR GAME 

the varmints. I know from the way Daniel Boone 
is watchin’ that he is a bit fearful. I think I shall 
tell him to-morrow when we start for our game 
that we will let the rest o’ the party go ahead of us 
and we will bring up the rear. It may save time 
to do that, because it will be easy to follow the 
trail they will leave. Most of this country is new 
to me and the only one that is sure of his way is 
the scout himself.” 

“I think that would be better,” assented young 
Boone, “and, besides, if we hunt in the rear of the 
party we shall be able to do double duty by serving 
as a rear guard at the same time.” 

“That is right,” laughed Sam. “Though that’s 
for the King to say. The great trouble with him 
is that he does not say very much.” 

“You have never been troubled that way, have 
you, Sam?” laughed Peleg. 

“I can’t say that I have. I think o’ so many 
things; and if I think o’ them I want some one 
else to know what they are, too. You make your 
arrangements with the King and we will be ready 
to do our share on the morrow.” 

Accordingly, on the following day, when the 
advance was resumed, Sam Oliver and his two 
young comrades waited for the cavalcade to pass 
and then began their task of providing supplies 
and game for the company. 

[ 29 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

The emigrants now were nearing Cumberland 
Mountain. The three mountains were not far 
apart and looked almost as if they had been care- 
fully planted at equal distances in the midst of the 
wilderness by some giant hand. Some of the 
cliffs were so wild and rugged that when the creak- 
ing wagons drew near the edge the children 
screamed in their terror. In the main, however, 
the trail was less difficult than had been expected. 
The huge masses of rock had been torn asunder in 
places by some volcanic action in preceding ages 
and had left narrow passageways through which 
the moving cavalcade was able to proceed without 
much difficulty. 

October had come and the foliage which had 
been slightly tinted in the preceding days had 
turned to a deeper shade. The trees were now 
ablaze with colour. Sam Oliver in his enthusiasm 
declared that within a half hour he and his com- 
panions would be able to rejoin the company with 
ample supplies for the following day. 

When the boys began their search for game his 
words seemed about to be verified: near the moun- 
tain brook they spied three deer, two of which 
fell at their first shot. Sam, who had preferred 
to hunt alone, also must have found game plentiful, 
the boys concluded, because twice within five min- 
utes the report of his gun had been heard. 

[ 30 ] 


THE HUNT FOR GAME 

“ We must get some turkeys before we go back,” 
suggested Peleg. 

“I am afraid you will have to wait until later in 
the day if you want to get them,” responded young 
Boone. 

“I don’t know about that,” began Peleg. He 
stopped abruptly when, as if in confirmation of his 
own opinion, a gobble was heard not far to their 
right. This was quickly followed by an answering 
gobble from their left. 

“You take one and I will look for the other,” 
eagerly suggested young Boone. 

The plan was instantly adopted, and each of 
the boys, crouching low and stealthily making his 
way among the trees and through the brush, tried 
to steal upon the bird, which still was noisily 
announcing its presence. 

James Boone moved forward thirty yards from 
the place where he had left his comrade and 
cautiously peered about him for a sight of the call- 
ing turkey. His feet, clad in moccasins, made 
little noise as he advanced over the moist ground. 
Deftly he parted the bushes in making his way, 
and they closed behind him with no more noise 
than as if they had been swayed by a gentle breeze. 

Suddenly young Boone came to a place from 
which he was able to see plainly a short distance 
before him. The gobble now was so distinct 
[ 31 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

that he held his gun in readiness for instant use. 
Cautiously advancing, he peeped from behind a 
tree, hopeful that he might obtain a sight of the 
bird he was seeking. To his terror he saw an 
Indian directly before him leaning against the 
trunk of a huge tree. The mouth of the warrior 
was partly closed by his hands. His face was 
daubed with paint, and his discoloured cheeks 
seemed to be doubly disgusting as he emitted 
sounds which even the keenest of the wild turkeys 
would scarcely have detected as different from its 
own. 


[ 38 ] 


CHAPTER IV 

THE GOBBLERS 


A T THE moment when the young pioneer dis- 
/ % covered the Indian, the warrior also be- 
X came aware of the presence of his enemy. 
Whether it was because James was amazed at the 
redskin’s skill in mimicking the call of the wild 
turkey, or because his enemy was somewhat quicker 
in his movements than he, is not known. At any 
rate, before young Boone could raise his gun to his 
shoulder the Indian turned and with all his strength 
hurled his tomahawk. 

True to its aim, the weapon struck the face of 
the young hunter, almost cleaving his head in 
twain. 

As the body of the stricken boy fell forward, the 
Indian halted a moment and then in his shrillest 
tones imitated the call of the crow four times. He 
waited until there was a response similar to his own, 
and then, running to the prostrate young hunter, 
deftly removed his scalp. He then dashed into 
the woods and ran in the direction from which the 
answering call had been heard. 

} 33 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Meanwhile Peleg Barnes, who had been striving 
to locate the “ turkey” which had been gobbling 
steadily in response to the calls of the one first 
heard, was more fortunate than his friend. Stealth- 
ily creeping through the bushes and darting from 
tree to tree, he discovered the warrior that was 
imitating the “gobbles” before the latter was aware 
of his presence. 

The boy almost intuitively was aware of the pur- 
pose of the warrior, and without hesitation raised 
his gun and fired. 

As the Indian fell to the ground Peleg did not 
wait to discover the effect of his shot, but ran 
back at his utmost speed toward the camp. Fre- 
quently, as he ran, the terrified young hunter 
shouted his warning of the presence of his enemies. 

Before he had regained the camp he was joined by 
Sam Oliver, who was angry as well as startled by 
the wild shouts of his young companion. 

“What’s the trouble, Peleg?” he demanded. 

“I shot a redskin! There must be a good many 
more!” replied the boy, almost breathless in his 
excitement. “The varmint was daubed with 
paint and gobbling like a turkey, trying to draw 
some one into his trap.” 

“Did young Boone go with you?” 

“No, he heard another ‘turkey.’” 

“Where is he now?” demanded Sam sharply. 

[ 34 ] 


THE GOBBLERS 


“I do not know. We must get word to the 
scout. ” 

Nothing more was said until the returning 
hunters, both of whom were running at their ut- 
most speed, came within sight of the place where 
the camp had been made. In a brief time 
they gained the open place in front, for the camp 
this time had been pitched on a small plateau, shel- 
tered by a frowning cliff on one side and protected 
by a steep, rocky gulch on another, while in front 
of it was sufficient space to enable the watching 
guard to detect the approach of an enemy from 
that direction. 

As soon as they were within hearing, both 
hunters shouted their warnings; but even as they 
raised their voices the sound of rifles was heard and 
a moment later there was a sudden cry and rush 
made by at least three score of the Indians. The 
suddenness of the attack as well as the lack of prep- 
aration, due to the faith of the emigrants in the 
security of the position which they had selected 
for their halt, and their confidence in the guards 
which had been stationed, prevented an immedi- 
ate response. 

The Indian warriors, hideously painted, crouch- 
ing low and running swiftly, and at the same time 
emitting their terrifying whoops, fired at every 
paleface that they could see. 

[ 35 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

To the startled pioneers the region seemed to be 
filled with their foes. The screams of frightened 
children, the calls of the women, and the shouts of 
the men as they summoned their companions in- 
creased the confusion. For a time the din was 
almost deafening. Above the shouts and cries were 
heard the frequent reports of the rifles of the at- 
tacking party. 

Peleg and Sam, who by this time had gained the 
shelter of the camp, instantly joined the few men 
that had rallied as soon as the warning was given. 
All now were doing their utmost to check the on- 
slaught. Every man, without waiting for orders, 
fired at the shouting, leaping savages. As soon as 
their guns had been discharged, however, it was 
plain that the attacking party had many other 
weapons. Those who had emptied their rifles 
brandished their tomahawks and tried to make 
amends by the fierceness of their cries for their 
lack of more formidable ways of attacking. In a 
brief time the defenders were thrown into con- 
fusion, outnumbered as they were at the moment, 
and driven back toward the place where the camp 
was located. 

It was speedily known that several had fallen 
before the fire of the warriors, but just who or how 
many there was no time to ascertain. It was now 
every man for himself as they sought protection 
[ 36 ] 


THE GOBBLERS 


behind the great trees or darted for the friendly 
shelter of rocks, which were numerous in the 
region. 

It was at this time, however, that the great 
leader himself appeared upon the scene. Familiar 
with the ways of the Indians, Daniel Boone ordered 
every man to conceal himself behind some tree and 
make no attempt to flee from the place until the 
entire party had been driven away. The presence 
of Boone seemed to revive the courage of the re- 
treating guards. As soon as sheltering places had 
been secured, every man reloaded his rifle and, 
following the example of the great scout, fired at 
the enemy, who now almost had crossed the open 
space before the camp. 

The fierceness of the onslaught of the Indian 
warriors was well known, but it was also under- 
stood by every white man that the red men seldom 
persisted in a long attack. A stealthy and sudden 
dash was their favourite method of fighting, but if 
the resistance was determined or prolonged they 
would usually withdraw to the shelter of the forest. 

In their present attack the Indians followed 
their customary plan. As soon as Boone and his 
companions ceased to flee and began to return the 
fire with vigour, the Indians faltered, and then, 
after they had given several unusually wild whoops 
and a final discharge of their weapons, they all fled 
[ 37 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

back to the protecting forest from which they had 
so suddenly emerged. 

As soon as the enemy had departed, Daniel 
Boone, who thoroughly understood Indian nature 
and ways, doubled the guards, assigned some of his 
followers to the task of bringing in the bodies of 
the fallen, and then ordered the others to withdraw 
within the camp itself, and hold themselves in 
readiness for a sudden call. Meanwhile they were 
told to do their utmost to quiet the frightened 
women and children, the latter still vocally ex- 
pressing their terror. 

It was soon learned that five of the whites had 
fallen. Their bodies were hastily borne within the 
protecting circle of the camp and two men who had 
been wounded were at once cared for. 

Peleg, whose excitement during the short, sharp 
fight had been intense, now recalled that he had 
not seen young Boone since his comrades had re- 
turned. Without voicing his fears he made a hasty 
tour of the camp, searching in every conceivable 
place for his friend. 

When at last the young hunter was convinced 
that James was nowhere to be found among the 
emigrants, he ran to Daniel Boone himself and said, 
“Have you seen James anywhere?” 

“No,” replied the scout, glancing keenly at the 
young hunter. “Was he not with you?” 

[ 38 ] 


THE GOBBLERS 


“We were together until we heard the ‘turkeys’ 
gobbling. Then he followed the sound of one and 
I went after the other. When I came near the 
place I saw it was a warrior trying to decoy us. ” 

“And James was not with you?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Did you call to him?” 

“No, sir. I shot the redskin and then started 
for the camp as fast as I could go. Sam Oliver 
came with me, and if it had not been for our alarm 
I am afraid the redskins would have done more 
damage than they did. ” 

The leader was silent as he gazed into the 
surrounding forest. He was well aware that the 
woods might conceal many more hostile Indians 
than had appeared in the sudden attack upon the 
camp. That he was deeply troubled by the mes- 
sage Peleg had brought him was manifest. Had his 
enemies already killed his son or had they made him 
a prisoner? What had become of James? 

“Do you think they have taken him?” inquired 
Peleg in a low voice. 

“That is what I hope,” replied Daniel Boone; 
and then in response to the unspoken question of 
the young hunter he added: “If they have made 
him prisoner we may be able to get him again, but 
if they have not ” 

What the pioneer scout left unsaid was fully 
[ 39 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

understood by Peleg, whose face became pale as 
he saw the anxiety of the leader for his boy. 

“A man must do his best, and it is useless to 
rebel,” said Daniel Boone, almost as if he were 
speaking to himself. “If James has fallen, all 
that we may try to do will be useless. If he has 
escaped, he will not need all our help. If the 
Shawnees have made him their prisoner, then we 
shall do more to help him by quick action than 
in any other way.” 

Turning from the women, who were weeping 
over the bodies of the dead men that had been 
brought back to the camp, in a few words Daniel 
Boone related to his companions what Peleg had 
told him. A band of twenty or more was speedily 
formed, every one eager to join in the search for 
the missing boy. 

“Peleg,” inquired the scout just before the men 
departed from the camp, “do you think you can 
lead the way to the place where you and James 
heard the ‘turkey’?” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Peleg. 

“Then let us start at once.” 

No man in the band was without fear when they 
entered the forest lest he might be the target of 
some concealed Indian. And yet the little force 
was relying upon the very boldness of their ven- 
ture for its success. 


[ 40 ] 


THE GOBBLERS 


There was no trace of fright, however, when 
the men ran across the open space and followed 
Daniel Boone as he led the way in the direction 
indicated by Peleg, who was close behind him. 

In a brief time the party came to the place where 
Peleg had shot the Indian that had been imitat- 
ing the gobble of a turkey. There was no delay, 
however, and as soon as Boone was convinced that 
the red man was dead he turned with his com- 
panions in the direction in which the other “tur- 
key” had been heard. 

As yet not a sign of the presence of their enemy 
had been discovered, although every one was aware 
that dark eyes were doubtless watching their every 
movement. Why they had not been fired upon 
was as yet not understood. 

In a few minutes, however, these things were 
forgotten when Peleg led the way to the place 
toward which his young companion had gone to 
seek the “turkey” which had so noisily announced 
its presence. 

A low exclamation escaped the young hunter’s 
lips when he and the leader halted a few minutes 
later and saw upon the ground before them the 
prostrate body of the missing boy. 


[ 41 ] 


CHAPTER V 


PELEG S NEW PLACE 


OT a word escaped Daniel Boone’s lips at 



the gruesome discovery of the body of 


JL his oldest son. He ran quickly forward, 
turned the body so that the face could be seen, 
and in this manner instantly realized the terrible 
fate which had overtaken James. 

Peleg Barnes, who was close behind him, never 
was able to forget the sound of the one long, dry 
sob to which Daniel Boone gave utterance. Then, 
almost as if he still was unaware of the presence 
of any one except the dead boy, he lifted the body 
tenderly, and with exceeding care placed it across 
his shoulders. Then, turning about, the great scout 
started back toward the camp. 

For a moment the other members of the party 
stood silent as they watched their suffering leader. 
There was not one of the men who would not have 
been glad to express his sympathy in words, but 
they were all aware of Daniel Boone’s prejudices 
against giving full expression to one’s feelings; 
and they had not yet recovered from the staggering 


[ 42 ] 


PELEG’S NEW PLACE 

surprise which the discovery of the body of James 
had created. 

When Daniel Boone disappeared in the brush, 
Sam Oliver ran to the spot where this discovery 
had been made and, picking up the gun of James, 
turned to his companions and said: “We must 
follow him. We must keep close to him. The 
redskins might almost scalp him and he would not 
understand what they are doing, the way he feels 
now.” 

Acting upon this suggestion, the men all turned 
to follow the direction in which their leader had 
disappeared. Peleg had run in advance of the 
other members of the band, eager to help the 
scout in his task. Quietly the leader shook his 
head, but did not speak in response to the young 
hunter’s offer to aid. Apparently he was hardly 
aware that his friends were so near him. 

Without delay the party soon gained the open 
space in front of the camp. There Daniel Boone 
stopped, and, turning to his friends, whose presence 
apparently neither surprised nor startled him, said : 
“I shall take my boy to the place where the other 
bodies are lying. I desire you to say nothing of 
what has befallen him until first I shall break the 
news to my wife.” 

No reply was given to the request of the hunter, 
nor was any expected. There was no protest by 
[ 43 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the scout, however, when Sam Oliver and Peleg 
followed him as he bore his burden to the place 
where the bodies of the men who had fallen in 
the sudden attack by the Indians were lying, cov- 
ered by blankets. There, still quiet, and as tender 
in his manner as a woman, Daniel Boone lifted the 
body of his boy from his shoulders and laid it 
beside those who were his fellow victims. 

Peleg, whose eyes were watching every move- 
ment of the man for whom his feeling was little 
less than adoration, in spite of his grief, marvelled 
at the wonderful strength the scout displayed. 
There was no evidence of struggle on his part, and 
as soon as he had deposited the body, Daniel Boone 
turned away, and the two hunters required no 
word from him to inform them that he had gone 
to tell his wife of the great sorrow which had come 
into their lives. Peleg’s eager look followed him 
even when he saw him beckon her to one side of 
the company, and then both withdrew from the 
sight of the entire band. The bearing of the scout 
was still unchanged. So great was his self-control 
that no one in the party, who did not know of the 
calamity, suspected that anything had befallen the 
leader beyond the common feeling of sorrow for 
the loss of the five men. 

What was said by Daniel Boone to his wife in 
that heartbreaking interview no one ever knew. 
[ 44 ] 


PELEG’S NEW PLACE 

When the scout rejoined the band, which now had 
assembled behind the protecting barricade, he 
said simply : “We must prepare for a hasty burial. 
These bodies must not be left for the wolves to mal- 
treat.” The leader spoke as quietly as if he were 
referring to one of the ordinary experiences of life, 
instead of one that would have wrung the heart of 
the strongest man. 

On the hillside, near the place where the camp 
had been pitched, the bodies of the fallen men were 
hastily buried. There were cries and sobs from 
many of those who had been bereaved, and the 
unutterable fear and horror which more or less 
possessed all the emigrant band were apparent in 
the glances of terror which were frequently cast 
toward the forest. Even some of the men gave 
way to their sorrow and anxiety. Not a trace of 
either emotion, however, was to be seen in the 
face of Daniel Boone when at last the leader turned 
away from the place of burial. 

Later in the day Peleg chanced upon the scout 
when the latter believed himself to be alone. 
Seated upon a log looking steadily upon the ground, 
still without a cry, the man’s frame was shaken 
in his agony of grief. Abashed by the discovery, 
Peleg, whose sorrow at the loss of his friend also 
had been keen, stealthily withdrew from the place 
and did not refer to his discovery when later he 
[ 45 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

joined his companions. Before the scout returned, 
the boy had decided that at his first opportunity 
he would explain to him how strong had been the 
friendship between himself and James. Peleg was 
too modest to believe that the great man had ever 
been aware of the friendship between the two boys. 
Such matters were of too minor importance for 
him even to recognize, much less to remember, 
thought the lad. 

Great then was the young hunter’s surprise, and 
greater still his pleasure, when the scout stopped 
by his side the next day and, looking into his face, 
said calmly, “Peleg, you and James were great 
friends.” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Hereafter I shall have a special love for you, 
Peleg, because you loved my boy.” 

Tears, which the young hunter was unable to 
control, sprang into his eyes at the words which 
were evidence not only of the keen observation of 
Daniel Boone but also of his regard for one who 
had been the friend of his son. Still the scout’s 
voice was quiet and calm. Peleg was convinced 
that he was not unaware of his inability to reply. 
“It is one of the things, Peleg, which cannot be 
changed,” continued Daniel Boone. “James was 
a good son and I looked forward to a useful life for 
him, but he is not to be here. It does no one any 
[46] 


PELEG’S NEW PLACE 

good to rebel uselessly, and only children and sav- 
ages complain when everything they desire is not 
arranged as they wish.” 

“ Yes, sir,” assented Peleg. At first he suspected 
that the words of the leader were intended as a 
rebuke to him for the display of his feelings. Per- 
haps it was a weakness, he thought, and yet, some- 
how, the young soldier was convinced that the 
father of his friend perhaps did not think any the 
less of him because he had been deeply moved by 
the tragic death of James Boone. 

“It is not the first time,” continued the scout, 
“ that I have been compelled to face sorrow. Some- 
how I feel that one is like a leaf carried on the 
stream. It may whirl about and turn and twist, 
but it is always carried forward.” As he spoke, 
the leader stooped, and taking a tiny branch which 
had fallen to the ground tossed it into the noisy 
little stream which went tumbling down the side 
of Cumberland Mountain on its way to the great 
river and the sea beyond. “It is somewhat like 
that, my lad,” continued Daniel Boone, running 
his fingers through his hair as he spoke. “Man 
is borne onward by a Power which he does not 
understand, and yet which he must recognize as 
greater than his own. It is so that one is carried 
by the years. One is helpless to stop them in their 
course, as helpless as that little branch which I 
[ 47 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

threw into the water. It does no one any good to 
rebel or complain. Every man must accept the facts 
of his life, believing that there is a Power that guides 
and controls far better than he knows how to do.” 

The scout spoke musingly, almost as if he thought 
himself to be alone. A brief silence followed his 
words, and then Daniel Boone turned once more 
to Peleg. “My lad,” he said, “all I say is that 
one cannot turn back. However much I may 
sorrow over the loss of my boy, I cannot go back 
to him. The only direction in which I can move 
is forward. If one can only find the right way, 
that is not so bad.” 

“Yes, sir,” said Peleg, hardly aware of the full 
meaning of Boone’s words. 

“You were a friend of my boy.” 

“Yes, sir,” again responded Peleg, his voice 
breaking once more in spite of his efforts at self- 
control. 

“You shall be my friend from this time forward. 
You cannot take the place of James, but because 
you were his friend you shall have a share, if you 
so desire, such as he might have had, in my life 
and my plans. Your father is not living?” 

“He has been dead three years.” 

“And your mother?” 

“She died when I was a baby.” 

“Then there is no one to whom you can turn?” 

[481 


PELEG’S NEW PLACE 

“I have lived with my uncle, but I have no 
desire to go back to him.” 

Boone looked keenly into the face of the boy 
by his side and was silent a moment. “Peleg,” 
he resumed, “I meant what I said just now. If 
you so desire, you shall be my friend.” 

“ I do desire it,” said Peleg impulsively. 4 4 There 
is nothing I want so much as I do to be with you. 
It is good of you to think of me ” 

“Say no more,” interrupted Boone. “I shall 
not forget, though I may not speak to you soon 
of this matter again. When the time comes, I 
shall not fail to let you know.” 

When night fell the guards of the camp were 
doubled, for with the coming of darkness the terror 
of some of the emigrants increased. There were 
frequent cries heard from the little children, cries 
which the mothers were unable to quiet and in 
which some of them even joined. A feeling of 
terror had settled over the whole camp. 

To Peleg was assigned a post of danger, as his 
position as guard was to be near the gulch. Steep as 
this was, it would have been possible for a warrior to 
climb its rocky sides if he were familiar with the spot. 

Before Peleg departed for his station he was 
joined by Israel Boone, a younger brother of 
James, who insisted upon sharing the vigil. In 
the light of the campfire Peleg saw the face of the 
[ 49 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

scout change colour when the suggestion was made 
by his son, but he did not offer any objection, and 
in spite of Sam Oliver’s declaration that “One 
boy was a boy and two boys was half a boy,” the 
leader qufietly gave his consent. 

When the silence of the outer night became 
more marked in the deepening darkness, the oc- 
casional cries of the children did not cease. They 
were cries not of suffering, but of terror. There 
were times when even the two young guards shared 
in the prevailing fear. The darkness that sur- 
rounded them might conceal painted warriors who 
were watchful of their every act. At any moment 
a bullet from some unseen enemy might find its 
way to the heart of a watching sentinel. Such a 
condition was not long to be endured. As the 
hours passed, both boys grew more eager for the 
coming of the morning, when, whatever plan might 
be formed, at least relief from the depressing si- 
lence would come. 

To Peleg no thought of any change in the plans of 
the emigrants had occurred, and he was therefore the 
more astonished the following morning when, after 
he had been relieved from duty and had obtained a 
few hours of sleep, he was informed before breakfast 
that the men were assembling for a council. Even 
his feeling of hunger was ignored in the exciting 
announcement which soon was made by Boone. 
[ 50 ] 


CHAPTER VI 


SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE 

B EFORE breakfast had been prepared Peleg 
was aware of a certain partly suppressed 
excitement among the members of the 
band. The women, with tears in their eyes and 
with their children clinging to their skirts, fre- 
quently had been in conference with Daniel Boone 
or with other men of the party. 

It was therefore not without some previous in- 
timation that Peleg heard the scout summon the 
men to a new conference. 

As soon as they were assembled Boone said, “It 
will not be possible for us to proceed at this time.” 
“Why not?” demanded Sam Oliver. 

“The women are terror-stricken. I myself had 
not thought that we should so soon be attacked 
by the savages. I have reason to remember our 
stay on Cumberland Mountain ” For a mo- 

ment the scout was silent, and an expression of 
sympathy ran through the entire assembly. Once 
more in control of his feelings, Boone continued: 
“ It is not for myself, as you know, that I am asking 
[ 51 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

this return. It is useless, however, now to go on 
with such fear among our womenfolk, and the 
redskins opposing us more strongly the farther we 
go into Kantuckee.” 

“Where can we go?” inquired one of the assem- 
bly. 

“I have decided that our best plan is to return 
to the settlement on the Clinch River.” 

“How far is that from here? ” asked the inquirer. 

“About forty miles.” 

“I am not one to favour return just because we 
have been unfortunate ” 

“There is no question,” said Daniel Boone, his 
eyes flashing in spite of the quiet manner of his 
speech, “about what we shall do. We shall make 
our plans to return at once.” 

Whatever feeling of rebellion may have been 
aroused in the minds of some of his followers, the 
decision of the leader was not to be disputed. The 
confidence of every one in his courage, integrity, 
and judgment was so strong that no one at the 
time would have dared oppose the great scout. 

Accordingly, hasty preparations were made for 
the return of the entire band, and within an hour 
the emigrants were on their way. 

The same order was maintained which previously 
had been used. An advance party of five and 
three rear guards were formed, but now the scout 
[ 52 ] 


SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE 

had in addition a small body moving on each flank, 
parallel with the main body. 

With the departure, renewed confidence came 
to all. As the band withdrew further from Cum- 
berland Mountain their spirits in a measure re- 
vived, and when on the third day they arrived at 
the little settlement which they were seeking on 
the Clinch River, even the tragedy which had be- 
fallen them was seldom mentioned. Even the 
packhorses pricked up their ears and required no 
incentive to induce them to move rapidly down the 
mountainside. 

When the emigrants at last arrived at their des- 
tination it was found necessary to erect several 
new houses. The nights already were cool, and a 
snowfall might be expected at any time. Even 
Sam Oliver, who seldom assisted in the labours of 
the settlements, was induced to aid his companions 
in felling the trees and cutting the logs for the 
little houses which must be the sole protection of 
the people throughout the coming winter. 

Not many weeks after the return of Daniel 
Boone and his party, Schoolmaster Hargrave found 
his way into the settlement. He was a peculiar 
man in his appearance, exceedingly awkward and 
angular, a fact which was made more marked by 
the odd clothing he wore. Disdaining garments 
made from the skins of wild beasts, his clothes were 
[ 53 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

of woollen material, and made, too, after a fashion 
that in itself was fearful and wonderful to behold. 
Even his cocked hat did not become him, but in 
some way seemed to make more prominent his 
long nose, which was covered with splotches of red, 
as were also his cheeks. That he was earnest and 
deeply interested in his tasks no one denied. The 
prime qualification for the work of the schoolmas- 
ter in that day, however, consisted in the fact that 
he was very muscular and able to compel the 
obedience of even the oldest boys in his school, 
who frequently were tempted to pit their strength 
against his. 

At the suggestion of the scout, a schoolhouse of 
logs was erected soon after the coming of Master 
Hargrave. In this little schoolhouse there was a 
fireplace, or chimney, which extended nearly across 
one entire end of the building. When a huge log 
fire was burning there it sent out not only its 
genial heat, but at frequent intervals with the 
changing winds it drew clouds of smoke down the 
chimney and into the eyes of the children that 
were seated on the rude benches. The little build- 
ing was equipped with more windows than the 
cabins which had been built for dwellings. The 
windowpanes were of paper and made transparent 
by oiling or greasing them. 

Young Daniel Morgan Boone, the third son of 
[ 54 ] 


SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE 


Daniel, became a constant companion of Peleg in 
the days that followed the return of the emigrants. 
Daniel had begun to attend school as soon as the 
rude little building was erected, and many of his 
experiences with the awkward schoolmaster were 
gleefully related to Peleg, who now was no longer 
counted a pupil of the master. 

“Master Hargrave,” said Daniel one day, “ makes 
us learn many verses of Scripture.” 

“Does he?” inquired Peleg. 

“Indeed he does. To-day he gave us three: 
‘ The rod and rule give wisdom,’ ‘ A rod fits a fool’s 
back,’ and ‘He that spoils the rod is not wise.’ ” 

Peleg laughed and said: “I remember those 
verses myself. He taught them to me. Does he 
rap your knuckles with his ferrule?” 

“Sometimes he uses a ferrule, but more often he 
stands there by one of the windows making a pen, 
and out of the corners of his eyes watches every one 
of the eighteen scholars. He always has a stout 
hickory in his hand or under his arm. The other 
day there was a disturbance on one of the benches, 
and without waiting to find who was guilty he 
laid his hickory across the backs of every one of 
us.” 

“So you have your share, too, do you?” 

“Indeed I do. But the strangest part was day 
before yesterday, when Schoolmaster Hargrave 
[ 55 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


chased Return Sharp. Return would rather go 
fishing or swimming or hunting any day than go 
to school. He says he does not care for learning. ” 

“He is a stout, burly fellow. I suppose a beat- 
ing does not trouble him much?” 

“That’s the strange part of it,” laughed Daniel 
gleefully. “He doesn’t seem to mind one at all. 
The other afternoon when the boys had been called 
in from recess, Return ducked around the corner of 
the house and began to run. Master Hargrave 
spied him, and, spitting on both his hands, he 
grasped his hickory and sallied forth to catch him. 
Return saw him coming and took to his heels. 
Every one in the school was out there in front of 
the schoolhouse watching the sport. We were 
ready to dodge back into our seats, but we wanted 
to see the race.” 

“What did he do? Did the master get him?” 

“Return took a circuit and started for the 
meadow, and in a little while he was of course 
coming back toward the schoolhouse. Master 
Hargrave was gaining upon him at every jump, 
and just as Return cleared the fence Master Har- 
grave let him have it with the hickory. For once 
in his life Return made haste, I can tell you. He 
was not very long in reaching the ground from the 
top of that fence! The schoolmaster was on the 
other side, and as he saw that all the scholars were 
[ 56 ] 


SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE 

watching him he jumped over the fence and started 
after Return faster than ever. I would not have 
believed that he could run so fast. Return looked 
back to see how near the schoolmaster was, and 
just then he stumbled and fell, and Master Har- 
grave was so close behind that he, too, stumbled 
over Return and then tumbled to the ground. 
Return jumped up and took a back track, but the 
Master was after him in a minute, and before he 
got halfway to the schoolhouse he had caught up 
with him, and at every jump the master also let 
him have it with the hickory. Return got the last 
love pat just as he tumbled over the fence and 
crawled into the schoolhouse. We all thought 
when the master came in that he would use his 
hickory on Return plentifully, and also on all the 
rest of us; but for some strange reason he seemed to 
have given Return all that he had to spare that 
day. Strange how he seems to take delight in 
beating poor Return. ” 

“He always took his whaling like an ox,” 
laughed Peleg, “and grows fat on it every day. I 
have marks yet on my knuckles that the school- 
master gave me. ” 

“What are you doing?” demanded Daniel, 
apparently for the first time becoming aware of 
Peleg’s occupation. 

“I am making a new stock for this rifle-barrel.” 

[ 57 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“The gun looks like it might kick,” commented 
Daniel sagely, looking critically at the rifle-barrel 
which was lying upon the rude little bench at 
which Peleg was working. 

“It would if a boy like you should try to use it. ” 

Daniel laughed derisively and said: “Pray, Mr. 
Venerable Barnes, how long since you were a boy 
yourself?” 

“If you think you can fire this gun, I shall let 
you be the first one to try it. I have it almost 
ready now, and all I have to do is to fit the barrel 
into the stock ” 

“Hello!” called Daniel, looking up sharply as he 
became aware of the approach of a man on horse- 
back. “This is some stranger. I wonder what 
he can be wanting.” 

A visitor from any of the faraway settlements 
was a matter of moment, and Peleg advanced to 
the door to see who the newcomer might be. 

The man was a stranger to both boys. As soon 
as he spied the lads he said, “Is Daniel Boone in 
this settlement?” 

“He is, sir,” answered Peleg promptly. 

“ Where can I find him? I would have word with 
him.” 

“Daniel, do you tell your father there is a 
gentleman here who desires to speak to him.” 

“I am a messenger,” spoke up the stranger, “a 
[ 58 ] 


SCHOOLMASTER HARGRAVE 

courier from Governor Dunmore. ’Tis a matter 
of importance, and Mr. Daniel Boone will do well 
to report promptly. ” 

Peleg looked at the messenger, who was not 
much older than he. His air of importance was 
not lost upon the young settler, who laughed 
slightly when, after Daniel ’s departure in search of 
his father, he turned again to the visitor. 

“It is a great honour I have for Daniel Boone, ” 
suggested the courier. 

“That depends somewhat, I fancy, upon who 
you are and what you have to bring him. ” 

“I have told you already that I am a messenger 
from Governor Dunmore. It is meet in you, young 
man, to respect men who are high in authority.” 

“I do respect the Governor,” said Peleg dryly. 

“Then you should have respect for the Gover- 
nor’s messenger.” 

“I have respect for all who are respectable.” 

“What mean you by that?” demanded the 
visitor hotly; as he spoke he leaped from the seat 
on the back of his horse and advanced threat- 
eningly upon Peleg. 

His attitude changed, however, when Peleg 
quietly stood his ground and even slightly smiled 
at the pompous words and manner of the visitor. 

The return of young Daniel Boone interrupted 
the interview. 


[ 59 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“My father will be pleased to see you,” said the 
lad, glancing questioningly first at Peleg and then 
at the messenger. 

“Of course he will see me,” declared the courier. 
“Why did he not return with you?” 

“He is awaiting your coming and bade me con- 
duct you to our home.” 

“Is it far from here?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Very good. I shall be pleased to go with you 
and give my message to Daniel Boone. ” 

Peleg was an interested observer of the depart- 
ing visitor, and his interest would have been still 
keener had he known how much the message from 
Governor Dunmore concerned his own future. 


[ 60 ] 


CHAPTER VII 


TWO SCOUTS 

P ELEG resumed his congenial occupation, 
working steadily upon the rifle which he was 
fashioning. The barrel had been part of a 
gun which belonged to one of the men who had 
fallen in the recent attack by the Indians, its stock 
having been shattered by the blow of a hatchet. 
After the weapon had been found, instead of throw- 
ing it aside as its finder was tempted to do, Peleg 
had taken it for himself. All the way from Cumber- 
land Mountain he had carried the barrel, which 
was all that he had saved of the rifle. He was 
aware of the confidence which its recent owner had 
in its qualities, and he had determined to fashion 
from it a gun for himself upon which he might 
rely. 

A smile of satisfaction lighted up the countenance 
of the young hunter when after several hours had 
elapsed he critically examined his new weapon, 
the parts of which now had all been joined. 

At supper time at the home of Daniel Boone, 
of whose family Peleg had been made a member 
[ 61 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


since the death of James, the visitor of the afternoon 
was recalled by a question of Israel Boone, the sec- 
ond of the five sons of Daniel Boone. 

“Why did not that man stay all night?” he 
inquired of his father when the family was seated 
about the rude table. 

“He would not remain,” replied his father 
quietly. 

“Who was he?” continued Israel. 

“A messenger from Governor Dunmore. ” 

The lad was eager to continue his questioning, 
but evidently he saw something in the glance of his 
father which precluded further attempts, and he 
became silent. 

It was not until the following morning that 
Peleg learned of the reason, and then only in part, 
for the coming of their recent visitor. 

“Peleg,” said Daniel Boone quietly, “would you 
prefer to remain here in the settlement, or go with 
me on a scout?” 

“I would rather go with you,” responded Peleg 
promptly. 

“It is possible that we may be gone two months 
or more. ” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And may have to travel something like eight 
hundred miles.” 

“I shall do my best.” 

[ 62 ] 


TWO SCOUTS 


“You are well aware, lad, that we shall meet 
many hard experiences.” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And you are not afraid?” 

“Not if you are to find the way.” 

Daniel Boone smiled and reached for Peleg’s 
new gun. He examined the weapon critically, 
raising it to his shoulder and sighting it several 
times. 

“’Tis a handy rifle, lad,” he remarked, when his 
inspection was ended. “Have you tried it?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And is it true?” 

“It is as far as I am able to make it so. ” 

“If you go with me, is this the gun you will 
take?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“ Why do you not prefer to remain in the settle- 
ment? There is work to be done here. The 
gardens are to be cared for and the game must be 
provided for the people. Here is where I should 
remain were it not that when I hear the call of 
Governor Dunmore I realize that there is work for 
me which I must not neglect.” 

Peleg was silent as he watched the great scout. 
Even while the man was speaking there came into 
his eyes an expression such as the boy had seen 
only when he and his friend had been together in 
[ 63 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the forest. It was the look of one seeing visions, 
and yet there was also in it the expression of a man 
of resolute purpose. 

“ ’Twill not do, ” continued Daniel Boone turning 
again to Peleg, “to take any chances. I had 
thought at first to take Sam Oliver with me, but 
now it seems good to me for you to go, if you so 
desire. ” 

“I do.” 

“I suggest that you try out your new rifle several 
times before we leave. The time to prepare is 
before we start. After we have gone on our way 
a hundred miles or more ’twill be difficult then 
to correct any fault or change any plans. More 
than half the winning of any battle depends upon 
the preparations one makes, I care not whether it 
be a fight with the Indians or with one’s own weak- 
nesses. There are other rifles from which you may 
make a selection,” Boone added. 

“Yes, sir, but I think I prefer this. I have 
made it myself and have tested and tried it every 
way. I have chosen a name for it.” 

“What have you named it?” inquired Boone. 

“Singing Susan.” 

“And you have sufficient bullets?’ 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And powder?” 

“Yes, sir,” responded Peleg. As he spoke he 
[ 64 ] 


TWO SCOUTS 


showed a huge powder-horn which he had polished 
and upon which he had carved the following dire 
warning : 

“Ye mann what steles this powd r home. 

Will go to helle as sure as y re borne. ” 

The scout slowly read the inscription and, shak- 
ing his head, said: “I think I should leave that 
horn behind. There are plenty more which are 
not so sharp in their warnings.” 

“But it is true, isn’t it? If a man steals, isn’t 
that the place where he belongs?” 

Apparently the thoughts of the great leader were 
withdrawn to other matters, for, ignoring the 
question, he said: “Peleg, we shall start before 
sunrise to-morrow morning. These June days are 
long and we do not want to lose any of the hours.” 

“Shall we stop at night?” 

“That will depend much upon events. There 
may be times when we shall be glad to have the 
night protect us in our advance, and when it will be 
necessary for us to hide in the daytime. There 
are some things to see to before we go. One of 
these is that you must learn how to follow my 
trail.” 

Peleg’s eager manner expressed a question. 
His interest was keen. 

“If you are lost or are not able to find me I shall 
[ 65 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

mark my trail with five stones placed like this.” 
As he spoke the pioneer arranged five small stones 
in a semicircle on the ground near him. “You 
may expect to find these near the springs or at the 
places where I may cross the rivers. We must 
plan to keep closely together, but I am referring 
to this in case anything should happen to separate 
us. There are some other things about which I 
shall tell you after we have started. I wish I felt 
a little more confidence in that rifle,” he added. 
“What did you say you have named it?” 

“Singing Susan.” 

Boone said no more, and Peleg withdrew beyond 
the border of the settlement to make additional 
tests of his newly made rifle. Apparently these 
were satisfactory, for at three o’clock the following 
morning when he and Daniel Boone departed from 
the little settlement it was “ Singing Susan,” which 
Peleg was carrying over his shoulder. 

As yet the boy did not know whither he and his 
comrade were going. Only in a general way had 
Boone explained how long they might be absent. 
However, it was clear to the mind of Peleg that 
the scout was moved by a feeling that he was en- 
gaging in an enterprise from which there was to be 
no turning back, and that he felt that he needed 
some one to accompany him. 

To be near Boone was sufficient reward in itself, 

[ 66 ] 


TWO SCOUTS 


and buoyantly the young man carried himself as 
they moved in single file through the passes of 
the mountains. It was seldom that either spoke, 
and it was agreed that their guns were not to be 
fired except when it was necessary to secure game. 

Many miles had been covered when the two 
hunters decided to rest, for night was at hand. 
Selecting a sheltered spot near a swiftly running 
brook, they were protected from peril from the 
rear of their camp by the huge walls of the hill 
which rose abruptly behind it. A fire was kindled 
with Peleg’s flint and tinder and allowed to burn 
only long enough to roast the loin of deer which 
had been secured by a shot from the scout’s rifle 
early that morning. 

As soon as their supper had been eaten the fire 
was extinguished. The June air was warm and it 
was with a sense of comfort that Peleg seated him- 
self upon the ground with his back against the 
protecting cliff. His companion had seldom spoken 
to him throughout their journey, and the pace at 
which they had been travelling had told more 
severely upon the younger hunter than upon Boone. 
Yet there was a feeling of deep comfort in Peleg’s 
heart. The stars were twinkling in the sky, the 
gentle breeze that swept the treetops was softly 
musical in its sound, and beyond all these was the 
pleasure of being in the company of the man to 
[ 67 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

whom he looked up as to no one else. All com- 
bined to make the young hunter happy. 

To his surprise he found that Daniel Boone was 
willing to talk more freely than he ever had known 
him to do before. 

“Yes,” Daniel Boone was saying, “my grand- 
father came from England and settled in Pennsyl- 
vania. He had nine sons and ten daughters. My 
father he called Squire. I do not know just why, 
unless it was because he was more active than his 
brothers. I was born on the right bank of the 
Delaware in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, in 1734. 
Not long after my father married he moved to 
another part of the colony, and when I was a little 
lad he took us overland through Maryland and 
Virginia and settled at the headwaters of the Yad- 
kin.” 

“A fine place, too, that is,” said Peleg. 

“Indeed it is,” assented the scout, “but it was 
not for me. Somehow I seem destined to find the 
way for others rather than to be able to enjoy 
much of quiet and rest myself. It was on the 
first day of May, 1769, that I left my family in 
quest of the country of Kantuckee. Five men 
travelled with me, all of us relying upon the reports 
of John Finley, one of our number, who had been 
trading with the Indians there. He averred that 
he had found the most beautiful of all lands. I 
[ 68 ] 


TWO SCOUTS 


shall not soon forget the seventh day of June that 
year, when John Finley and I, from the top of an 
eminence, looked out upon the beautiful land of 
Kantuckee. Buffalo were more numerous than 
are cattle in the settlements. They fed upon the 
grass that grows marvellously on those plains. 
We saw hundreds in a drove, and the numbers 
about the salt springs were amazing. On the 22d 
of December, John Stuart and I were having a 
pleasing ramble. We had passed through a great 
forest and were amazed at the variety of the blos- 
soms we saw. As for game, why it almost seemed 
to seek us out instead of making us the hunters. 
It was near sunset and we were near the Kantuckee 
River, when a number of Indians rushed out of a 
canebrake and made us their prisoners.” 

44 How long did they keep you?” 

“Seven days. We did our utmost not to show 
any uneasiness, and gradually they became less 
suspicious of us. But in the dead of the night of 
that seventh day, when we were lying by a large 
fire and all the others were asleep, I gently shook 
my companion, whispered my plan, and we left 
the camp without disturbing any one. My brother 
and another man, who had started after us to 
explore the country, found the camp of our party, 
but it had been plundered and the other men in 
our band had fled. Strangely enough, we soon 
[ 69 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

came upon one another in the forest. You may 
be sure that this meeting with my brother was 
most welcome. The man who was with him, how- 
ever, soon went on a private excursion and was 
attacked and killed by wolves. John Stuart was 
killed by the Indians. There we were in a howling 
wilderness, hundreds of miles from our families and 
surrounded by Indians who were determined to 
kill us. All through that winter we had no trouble, 
however, and on the first of the following May 
my brother went home for a new recruit of horses 
and ammunition, leaving me alone. I had been 
without bread for a year; I had no salt nor sugar, 
and not even a horse or a dog for company. 

“I knew I must not lament, however, and ac- 
cordingly I undertook a tour which I thought 
might be of benefit to others who, I had no doubt, 
soon would follow me. Often I heard the hideous 
yells of the savages searching for me. On the 
27th of July my brother returned, and together 
we went as far as the Cumberland River, scouting 
through that part of the country and giving names 
to the different rivers. In the following March I 
went back to my family, determined to bring them 
as soon as possible, even at the risk of life and 
fortune, to make a home in Kantuckee, which I 
esteemed a second Paradise. 

“You know, my lad, how I sold my land on the 
[70] 


TWO SCOUTS 


Yadkin and disposed of such goods as we could not 
carry with us, and how with five other families we 
started on the 25th of September to journey to Kan- 
tuckee. You were one of us at that time. 

“You well remember also what occurred on the 
10th of October, when our company was attacked 
by the Indians, how I lost my boy, and how we 
all journeyed back to the settlement on the Clinch 
River.” 

“And now?” queried Peleg. 

“And now,” answered Daniel Boone, “you and 
I are to journey to the Falls of the Ohio. Our 
surveyors there are in great peril from the Indians. 
We shall, without doubt, find ourselves often in 
danger, and I am selecting you to accompany me 
because already I have found that I could rely 
upon you. You have been quick to learn what 
I have taught you, and I do not believe you will 
easily be taken unawares, because you have already 
learned how to prepare yourself for any event. 
Any one who has not learned that lesson can never 
become a successful man, to say nothing of suc- 
ceeding as a scout.” 


[ 71 ] 


CHAPTER VIII 

peleg’s encounter 

T HE following morning dawned clear and 
warm, and as no signs of Indians had been 
seen the two scouts renewed their journey 
with lighter hearts. At least a part of Peleg’s 
fear was gone, though it was impossible for him to 
determine by anything his companion said whether 
or not he shared his feeling. 

Without an open declaration of war, the Shaw- 
nees, Wyandottes, Cherokees, and Delawares were 
working more or less together at this time and 
were untiring in their determination to prevent the 
whites from entering and establishing homes in the 
region which the Indians believed was entirely their 
own. 

The second day passed, and the progress of the 
two scouts was unbroken. Still Daniel Boone was 
using great caution, forbidding the discharge of guns 
except when food was required, and insisting upon 
the fire being extinguished as soon as the meals 
had been prepared. 

On the fourth day of their journey the anxiety 
[ 72 ] 


PELEG’S ENCOUNTER 

of the great scout became more manifest. “I 
have seen some things,” he explained to his com- 
panion, “which are troubling me.” 

“Are the Indians near us?” 

“I have been convinced that they have been 
near us all our journey, but I fear now they are 
approaching still nearer. My suggestion is that 
we separate, and I will go to the south and you to 
the north of the path we would have taken and meet 
again in our camp here a few hours from this time. 
We may throw them off our trail. ” 

“Shall we start now?” inquired Peleg, rising at 
once as he spoke. 

“’Twill be well to do so. The sun is now two 
hours high, and we must both be back here in camp 
by noon. ” 

As he finished speaking, Daniel Boone departed 
silently into the forest and his example was promptly 
followed by the younger scout. 

The young hunter had been gone almost an hour 
and as yet had discovered only a few signs of the 
presence of their enemies. He was near the bank 
of a stream some twenty feet or more in width when, 
glancing behind him, he saw two Indians swiftly 
approaching. 

His first impulse was to fire upon them, but 
holding his rifle in readiness he waited for them to 
come nearer. Suddenly one of the red men raised 
[ 73 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

his gun and fired at Peleg. The young scout heard 
the bullet whistling close to his head, and, instantly 
taking aim, returned the fire, causing one of the 
Indians to fall forward upon his face. The other 
warrior, however, was armed, and was swiftly 
approaching. 

Peleg’ s first impulse to use his gun as a club and 
strive to defend himself was quickly adandoned 
when in some consternation he became aware of the 
size of the advancing red man. Never before had 
he seen an Indian so large as the one who was 
now approaching. Not merely was the man tall, 
but his breadth of shoulder and every movement 
alike showed the great strength which he pos- 
sessed. 

Thinking this was a case where discretion was 
the better part of valor, Peleg darted swiftly into 
the woods. As he did so his enemy fired at him, 
but fortunately the boy escaped unhurt. He ran 
at his utmost speed, but as he glanced over his 
shoulder he saw that his pursuer was speedily 
gaining upon him. Peleg Barnes was considered the 
best wrestler and the strongest of the younger men 
in the little settlement on the Clinch River. He 
now was more than six feet tall and the muscles in 
his arms and legs were marvellously developed. If 
the man behind him had not been of such gigantic 
and ferocious aspect, the young hunter would have 
[ 74 ] 


PELEG’S ENCOUNTER 


ventured a single combat; but Peleg had decided 
that flight was the safer course. 

For several hundred yards he ran at his utmost 
speed, but every glance backward showed him that, 
swiftly as he was running, his pursuer was steadily 
gaining upon him. 

The woods through which they were speeding con- 
sisted almost entirely of small trees, few of which were 
large enough to provide protection or even shelter. 

Peleg had passed a large walnut tree, which he 
had noticed standing like a patriarch among the 
surrounding saplings, and suddenly he paused in 
his flight and ran back ten steps to gain it. This 
action of the young scout plainly startled the 
Indian, who halted a moment, thereby giving his 
adversary the advantage of reaching the shelter he 
was seeking. 

If Peleg ’s gun had been loaded the solution of his 
troubles would not have been difficult. As it was, 
the huge warrior resumed his rapid advance. 
Again Peleg fled, but he was well aware that sooner 
or later he must stop and strive to defend himself 
by using his rifle as a club. 

The moment for such action soon came, and, 
abruptly halting, Peleg seized his rifle by the barrel 
and raised it above his head. The Indian dropped 
his empty gun and advanced upon his victim with 
his tomahawk. 


[ 75 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Instead of waiting to receive the attack, Peleg 
suddenly leaped forward and struck with the 
stock of his gun. The warrior at the same moment 
whirled his tomahawk and threw it. 

In a manner both blows took effect. The stock 
of the rifle was dislocated by the blow which Peleg 
struck the Indian’s skull, and at the same time 
the vicious blow of the tomahawk was deflected by 
the barrel of the rifle, though it cut deeply into 
Peleg ’s hand between his thumb and forefinger as 
it glanced. 

As the Indian attempted to draw his knife, Peleg 
seized him and together both fell to the ground. 

For a time the efforts of the Indian were by no 
means violent, and Peleg was hopeful that the blow 
which the warrior had received had partly disabled 
him; but it was soon manifest that the Indian had 
recovered, for, wrapping his long arms around 
Peleg ’s body, he pressed him to his breast with 
well-nigh crushing force. 

Peleg, powerful young scout that he was, had 
never felt an embrace like that of the huge warrior. 
Relaxing his efforts for a moment, he endeavoured 
to convince his enemy that his strength was well- 
nigh gone. The Indian apparently was deceived 
by his trick and made an attempt to reach for 
Peleg ’s gun, which had fallen on the ground near- 
by. The young hunter at the same moment made 
[ 76 ] 


PELEG’S ENCOUNTER 

a sudden and desperate attempt to free himself 
from the arms of the giant. 

Success crowned his efforts, but before he was 
able to escape from the place the Indian leaped to 
his feet, and, seizing Peleg with one hand and grasp- 
ing the collar of his hunting shirt with the other, he 
drew his enemy steadily to his hip, and then by a 
sudden effort threw him at least ten feet into the 
air, much as he might have tossed a little child. 
Peleg fell upon his back at the edge of the stream, 
but before the savage could spring upon him, he 
was again upon his feet, and, stung with rage as 
well as desperation, instantly, and with a violence 
which for a time made up for his lack of strength, 
he renewed his attack upon his gigantic enemy. 

The Indian, however, closed again with Peleg 
and hurled him to the ground, though the young 
hunter still doggedly clung to his foe. Together 
they rolled into the water, where the struggle contin- 
ued unabated for a time, as each did his utmost 
to thrust and hold the head of his opponent be- 
neath the surface. 

It soon was plain that the Indian was unused to 
such long-continued and violent exertion, and 
Peleg felt sure that his enemy was weaker than 
when the struggle began. 

Suddenly the young hunter by a supreme effort 
seized the warrior by his scalp-lock and thrust his 
[ 77 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

head under the water, where he succeeded in hold- 
ing it until the struggles of the Indian became 
faint and convinced Peleg that the contest was 
ended. 

The cunning warrior, however, had been sham- 
ming, and as soon as Peleg released his hold he 
quickly regained his foothold and in turn forced 
Peleg under the water. In the struggle which fol- 
lowed both contestants were carried into the current 
of the stream beyond their depth, and were com- 
pelled to let go their hold and swim for their lives. 

Peleg was the first to gain the shore. A low hill, 
partly wooded, was directly before him, and he ran 
as swiftly as his strength permitted up the long, 
sloping ridge. In a brief time he discovered that 
the Indian was gaining upon him so rapidly that 
all hope of escape departed. 

At that moment the young scout saw at his side 
a large tree, which in some storm had been torn up 
by its roots and was lying prostrate on the ground. 

Instantly he ran along the side of the tree, aware 
that his enemy was following upon the opposite 
side. Doubtless the red man expected to seize him 
when the huge roots of the tree had been gained. 

On the warm ground at the roots of the tree, all 
unknown to the pursuer and the pursued, a huge 
she-bear was lying with her two cubs. The In- 
dian was the first to arrive at the spot, and as he 
[ 78 ] 



“ The Indian had been able to draw his knife and struck 
at her again and again, while the bear held him in one of her 
most fervent hugs ” 


















































PELEG’S ENCOUNTER 

darted around the roots the savage animal with a 
snarl of rage instantly sprang upon him. The 
growls of the bear and the cries of the warrior 
instantly produced a deafening uproar. 

The Indian had been able to draw his knife, and 
struck at her again and again while the bear held 
him in one of her most fervent hugs. Peleg, 
without waiting to learn the result of the startling 
and noisy contest, instantly turned and ran back 
over the way he had come. 


L79] 


CHAPTER IX 


AT THE SPRINGS 

T HE young scout was breathless and ex- 
hausted when at last he arrived safely at 
the camp. His appearance was such that 
no explanation was required by Daniel Boone, 
who was already there. He instantly noticed the 
wound which Peleg had received on his hand and 
how blood-stained his clothing was. He asked no 
questions, however, and at once attended to the 
wants of his companion. 

In a short time Peleg had recovered sufficiently 
to enable him to relate the story of the adventures 
which had befallen him. 

“You have lost Singing Susan?” suggested 
Boone. 

Peleg nodded in response, but did not speak. 
“Can you find the place where you dropped 
her? ” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And the place where the Indian was hugged 
by the bear?” 

Again Peleg nodded. 

[ 80 ] 


AT THE SPRINGS 

“ If you will tell me where the places are I might 
go to both of them.” 

“ Very well,” said Peleg quickly, 44 but I shall go 
with you.” 

Boone said no more and busied himself in ar- 
ranging the small packs which the two scouts 
were carrying. It was not long before Peleg de- 
clared he was ready to accompany his friend, and 
without a further word they departed from their 
camp. 

It was not difficult for the young hunter to find 
his way to the place where the Indian had been 
seized by the angry mother-bear. Cautiously ap- 
proaching, both men peered intently about them, 
but they were unable to discover any signs of either 
the warrior or the animal that had attacked him. 
When they advanced to the spot where the tree 
had been uptorn by the roots they found an abund- 
ance of footprints of the bear and also of the moc- 
casined Indian, but that was all. 

44 They both got away,” said Boone at last. 

44 Or ate each other up,” suggested Peleg with a 
smile. 

44 We will look for Singing Susan. You lead the 
way, Peleg.” 

Wearied as Peleg was by his recent contest, he 
nevertheless responded promptly, and in a brief 
time the hunters arrived at the border of the stream 
[ 81 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

near which Peleg had been compelled to drop his 
rifle. When he had cast it from him he had tossed 
it into the nearby bushes, dimly thinking that if 
by chance he should escape he might return and 
find the weapon which he prized so highly. A 
part of the scout’s teachings already had taken 
effect in this forethought of his young comrade. 
To be prepared for any emergency was an essential 
part of life in the woods. As they drew near the 
spot, Peleg was thinking of the great lesson he had 
learned from Boone. He ran to the bushes, pushed 
aside the brush and drew forth his gun with some 
pride. A smile lighted the face of Boone as he 
nodded his head in approval of the forethought of 
his young friend, and advancing, he extended his 
hand to inspect the weapon. 

“WTiat happened to the gun?” he inquired, as 
he marked the condition of the stock. 

“I struck the skull of the Indian.” 

“ ’Twas a hard blow, son, and I have slight doubt 
the Indian’s head is aching.” 

“If it had not been for that, I should not be 
here to tell you about it now.” 

“No one can say about that. You are here, 
Peleg, and we must act upon that which is rather 
than upon what might have been. Indeed, I have 
long since learned to accept my life with that under- 
standing. I had nothing to say about when I 
[ 82 ] 


AT THE SPRINGS 

should come into the world, and I have as little 
to say about when I shall leave it. The only part 
I can guide is that which is in between. I can 
fix this stock,” he added, “and soon we shall have 
Susan singing again. We will push forward a little 
farther and find some place where we can camp for 
the night. A good sleep will do you more good 
than anything else, though first I must attend again 
to that hand of yours.” 

Selecting a linen bandage, a small supply of 
which Boone always carried with him on his expe- 
ditions, he gathered some leaves of the witch-hazel 
plant and, pounding them to a pulp, spread them 
upon the cloth. Thoroughly washing the wounded 
hand of Peleg, he then bound the cloth and pulp of 
the leaves upon the wound, saying as he did so: 
“In a week you will be as good as new.” 

As soon as this task had been accomplished the 
journey was resumed, although only two miles 
was covered before Boone was convinced that his 
companion was too weary to proceed farther. 

The following day, although Peleg’s hand still 
was sore from his wound, he found little difficulty 
in carrying his rifle, for the great scout had been 
successful in restoring Singing Susan to her former 
efficient condition. 

Increasing signs of the presence of the Indians 
were seen, and once Boone turned aside from his 
[ 83 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

pathway when an old canoe was found, which with 
a little effort he was able to patch up. 

“I am fearful of the water,” he said, “for I can- 
not swim. Can you, son?” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Peleg, glancing up in aston- 
ishment at this acknowledgment of his friend’s one 
weakness. 

“It is well you can,” said Boone with a smile. 
“I never was able to get the knack. You will 
have to be the leader now. We can go down this 
stream five or six miles, perhaps more, before we 
strike across the country again.” 

“How is it,” inquired Peleg, “that you find your 
way through the forests? I am never afraid of 
being lost in any of the woods where I have been 
before, but I should not be sure of myself in trying 
to go to the Palls of the Ohio, although even now 
we must be within a few days of the place.” 

Boone smiled as he replied: “There are some 
things which a man can learn and some which 
must be born in him to help him in the forests. 
A man who can sing, if he will go to the singing 
schools faithfully, may become a better singer; but 
if he has no voice to begin with, there is little use 
in his saying do , ra , me , fa, so, la, si, do over and 
over again. So it is in the woods. I watch the 
birds, the trees, and the leaves, as well as the lay 
of the land, but beyond all that there is a part 
[ 84 ] 


AT THE SPRINGS 

which I cannot explain. It must be my nature, 
just the same as it is for a fish to live in the water 
or a bee to seek the flowers.” 

“Do you think I ever can learn?” 

“I do, son. I have marked you often and know 
that you have the ability as well as the will to 
learn.” 

Signs of the presence of Indians increased as the 
two scouts proceeded. It seemed to Boone that 
the Indians were moving eastward, a matter which 
promised ill for the scattered settlements on the 
border. 

However, the days passed, and Boone and his 
companion evaded their foes, and on the twenty- 
ninth day arrived at the Falls of the Ohio, whither 
Governor Dunmore had directed them to go. 

Only once had Daniel Boone referred to the 
purpose of his journey, and then he had explained 
to Peleg how the Governor had become exceedingly 
anxious concerning the safety of the surveyors. 
Cut off as they were in their faraway camp from 
the help of others, they also were unaware that the 
hunters were bringing word of the increasing rest- 
lessness among the Indians. Some of the scat- 
tered settlers recently had been killed by the angry 
tribes, and the rumours and reports all had it that 
the Shawnees, Delawares, and Wyandottes were 
becoming more and more savage in their attacks 
[ 85 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


upon the whites, upon whom they now looked with 
deadly hatred because they were making homes 
in their land. 

The coming of Daniel Boone and his young com- 
panion aroused much interest among the band of 
surveyors whose headquarters were at the Falls 
of the Ohio. Several log houses had been erected 
by them there, and the little settlement bore more 
evidences of refinement than one usually found on 
the frontier. There were many questions asked 
and a deep interest shown in the doings of the 
great world beyond, with which the lonely men 
had had nothing to do for many long months. 

When, however, Daniel Boone explained the 
purpose of his coming, most of the men received 
his word with incredulity. They acknowledged 
that occasionally they had seen a few Indians, but 
not yet had they been molested, nor had any threats 
been made against their remaining where they 
were. 

To such statements the great scout made no 
reply except to repeat the reason for his coming, 
and the anxiety of Governor Dunmore in their 
behalf. 

“We will sleep over it and let you know to- 
morrow,” declared one of the men laughingly. 
“You don’t think anything will happen to-night, 
do you?” 


[ 86 ] 


AT THE SPRINGS 


“I am willing to wait until the morrow,” said 
Boone quietly. “You must decide, however, with- 
in two days what you will do.” 

There was one young member of the surveyors’ 
party who apparently had not been long in the 
new world. He explained to Peleg, to whom he 
was drawn because they were nearly of the same 
age, that he had come to America to make a for- 
tune. “I am the youngest son of Earl Russell. 
In England the younger boys do not have many 
opportunities, because all the property is left to 
the oldest son, so I have come to America, and 
hope to secure for myself some great tracts of land 
over here. They may not be valuable to-day or 
in the near future, but some time, as surely as the 
sun rises, they will be of great worth. You must 
come with me,” he continued, “early to-morrow 
morning to Fontainebleau.” 

“Where?” demanded Peleg. 

“Fontainebleau.” 

“Where is that, and what is it?” demanded the 
young scout. 

“It is a name we have given to a spring about a 
mile from here on the opposite side of the river. 
Five or six of us go there every morning and drink 
the waters. We have an idea that they are better 
than the waters of the real Fontainebleau.” 
“Where is that ? 55 


[ 87 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

The young Englishman laughed as he said: 
“’Tis plain that you have never travelled in 
France.” 

“I never did,” acknowledged Peleg. “I have 
travelled in the woods, though, and before we get 
back to the settlement some of you may be glad 
that Daniel Boone and I have had that experience.” 

The young Englishman again laughed, but made 
no reply. 

In the morning, however, he, together with six 
other men, stopped at the little cabin in which 
Daniel Boone and Peleg had been spending the 
night, and in response to his invitation the young 
scout joined the party when they explained that 
they were going to Fontainebleau to drink of its 
marvellous waters. 

The carelessness and indifference of the men 
somewhat alarmed Peleg, who was still under 
the influence of his recent companion, the scout. 
Daniel Boone had impressed upon the boy the need 
of continual vigilance and silence. No one could 
say when danger might suddenly present itself. 
Frequently he recalled the escape he had had 
through the shot which James Boone in the pre- 
ceding year had fired at the panther crouching 
above his head. This always impressed the young 
woodsman afresh with the need of continual care. 
Nevertheless he enjoyed the conversation of the 
[ 88 ] 


AT THE SPRINGS 

men with whom he was walking, though he him- 
self seldom spoke. 

When the little party arrived at the spring the 
waters caused Peleg to express his disgust. Heavily 
charged with sulphur and various other chemicals, 
the taste was one that did not appeal to the young 
scout. His companions, however, professed to en- 
joy the water, which was marvellously clear and 
sparkling, and drank deeply, casting themselves 
prostrate upon the ground as they did so, and drink- 
ing from the spring. 

Three of them were in this position and the 
other four were urging their companions to make 
haste, when suddenly wild yells arose that seemed 
to come from every direction at once. Before the 
startled men were fully aware of what was occurring 
a band of Indians rushed from the woods, some 
armed with rifles and others using their bows and 
arrows. 

Only part of the little band of surveyors had 
been armed when they had started that morning 
from the settlement for the spring at Fontaine- 
bleau. The young scout, however, who was mind- 
ful of the teachings of his leader, had brought 
Singing Susan with him. As Peleg was about to 
fire, an arrow pierced the young Englishman be- 
tween the shoulder blades, and with a loud cry he 
fell to the ground. 


[89J 


CHAPTER X 


A TERRIFIED BAND 

I T WAS Peleg’s first experience in taking com- 
mand of a party. The helplessness of the 
surveyors, however, and the fact that they 
all turned to him for directions, at once decided 
the young scout to lead, and he well knew there 
was no time to be lost. 

In his position he was aware also that the Eng- 
lishman was in dire distress, and apparently he was 
the only one who could aid him. The decision to 
act had come to the young scout promptly, and he 
had almost instinctively raised Singing Susan to 
his shoulder and fired at the Indians, whom he could 
see darting from tree to tree and plainly trying to 
come nearer the spring. 

Before he reloaded his gun Peleg turned to his 
companions, two of whom were already disappear- 
ing among the trees in the distance. 

“Come here,” he said in a low voice. “Help 
me with this man.” 

Two of the young surveyors obeyed his word, 
and with all speed the trio carried the body of 
[ 90 ] 


A TERRIFIED BAND 


their fallen comrade within the shelter of the forest. 
When Peleg looked down into the face of the suffer- 
ing man he was convinced that his wound was 
fatal. 

It would never do, however, to leave the man in 
his misery. Turning to his companions he called: 
“ Retreat cautiously ! Use the tree trunks for shel- 
ter! Take this man with you!” 

While speaking, the young scout hastily re- 
loaded his gun. This task completed, he turned 
once more to his companions and said: “Take 
the man now and go! Do as I tell you! I shall 
bring up the rear and do my best to stave off the 
Indians. They are sure to follow us, though I do 
not think there are more than eight or ten in the 
whole band.” 

Three of the men who were members of the 
party which had visited the spring had brought 
their guns with them. Two of these weapons were 
in the hands of the men who were to carry the 
young surveyor back to the settlement. 

Seizing these weapons and making certain that 
all were loaded and primed, Peleg darted behind a 
huge maple, from which he was able to see that 
the Indians were stealthily approaching. No cry 
had been heard from them since the loud whoop 
they had given when first they had darted into the 
open space and fired upon the unsuspecting men. 

[ 91 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Peleg waited until the men who were carrying 
the surveyor had had an opportunity to withdraw 
to a considerable distance among the trees, and as 
he saw the red men were coming nearer he abruptly 
fired upon them. He first discharged Singing Su- 
san, and then, before the smoke had cleared, he 
fired the other two guns in quick succession. 

A low exclamation of pleasure escaped his lips 
when he saw that his shots had taken sufficient 
effect to cause the Indians hastily to disappear 
from sight and to send forth several of their noisy 
challenges. 

Taking advantage of the favouring opportunity, 
the young scout reloaded his own rifle and, casting 
the other two guns from him, ran at his utmost 
speed in the direction in which his recent compan- 
ions had disappeared. 

As soon as he had overtaken them he was aware 
that the Indians were again closing in upon the 
retreating band. He was startled to find that the 
red men were moving in the form of a semicircle. 
By this means they doubtless hoped to cut off 
the men before they could regain the safety of the 
settlement. 

Bidding his friends make haste with their bur- 
den, Peleg once more fired upon the yelling Indi- 
ans. His main purpose was to try to impress upon 
their minds the fact that the retreating band was 
[ 92 ] 


A TERRIFIED BAND 

armed and prepared to defend itself. He was 
more and more disturbed, however, by his in- 
creasing fear that their retreat would be cut off, 
and all three might fall into the hands of the yell- 
ing savages. 

Several times the same maneuvers were followed, 
Peleg bidding his friends, who still were carrying 
the young surveyor, to precede him on their way 
back to the settlement, while he himself remained 
behind to fire Singing Susan at such of the Indians 
as exposed themselves. After each shot he hastily 
reloaded his rifle and withdrew to join his com- 
panions. 

After his third shot Peleg was almost persuaded 
that escape was impossible. The semicircle had 
been extended until he was fearful that if the war- 
riors should rush upon them they would enclose the 
three white men. 

Still the boy was determined to do his utmost 
to help the fallen surveyor and protect the two 
men who were bearing their unconscious comrade 
through the forest. In his zeal the young scout 
had almost forgotten his own peril. His attention 
was divided between the retreating party and the 
Indians who were pressing so swiftly upon them. 

Suddenly Peleg said to himself, as he heard the 
report of a rifle far away, 44 There is Daniel Boone! 
If he and the other surveyors have come out to 
[ 93 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

help us we may stand a little better chance of get- 
ting out of this alive.” 

The report of the rifle which had been heard by 
Peleg was speedily followed by the sound of other 
guns. Convinced by what he had heard that help 
was at hand, Peleg regretted the loss of the guns 
which he had cast aside in his fear that they might 
hinder him and his friends in their efforts to with- 
draw from the spring. Soon the reports of the 
guns were repeated, and as Peleg sent forth his 
wild halloo he was answered by a cry which he rec- 
ognized as coming from Daniel Boone himself. 

It was not long before Peleg saw the scout ap- 
proaching through the forest. The silent man was 
thoroughly aroused. Usually quiet in his manner 
and deliberate in his actions, it now seemed as if 
his every nerve was tingling in his excitement. 
Sheltered behind nearby trees, Peleg watched the 
approaching surveyors, some of whom were loading 
their rifles rapidly, while others were firing at the 
enemy. 

It was soon evident that the Indians, disheart- 
ened by this fresh attack, were withdrawing into 
the forest. 

As soon as Daniel Boone saw Peleg and the two 
men approaching with their burden, his plan in- 
stantly changed. Summoning the young scout, 
he said, “Send all the rest of them back to the 
[ 94 ] 


A TERRIFIED BAND 

settlement as fast as they can go. You and I, lad, 
are the only ones prepared, so we are the only ones 
who can protect these men.” 

“Will the Indians leave?” inquired Peleg in a 
low voice. 

“For a time, yes,” answered Daniel Boone. “If 
the surveyors make haste they will be able to get 
back to the settlement. You and I, lad, must try 
to hold these Indians off until our friends have had 
time to carry back the man who was shot. Was he 
killed?” 

“No. He was alive when I saw him last, but I 
do not think he will live long.” 

“Was it an arrow?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

Daniel Boone nodded his head and made no 
further reply. Darting from tree to tree, the two 
scouts stealthily made their way through the forest 
in the direction in which their friends had gone. 

Apparently there was no longer any peril of an 
immediate attack by the Indians. None of them 
appeared within sight, and the sound of their wild 
cries no longer was heard. 

Alternately stopping and retreating, Daniel 
Boone and his young companion at last regained 
the shelter of the settlement at the Falls of the 
Ohio. 

The little houses of logs were well protected, and 
[ 95 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

as there was an abundance of ammunition as well 
as of food on hand, the great scout said to Peleg: 
“ We could hold out here two months if it should be 
necessary.” 

“But we are not to stay here, are we?” inquired 
Peleg anxiously. 

“No. We must leave just as soon as we can do 
so safely.” 

The conversation was interrupted by the en- 
trance of the surveyors in a body. Fear, and even 
panic, was manifest in the face of every one. The 
unexpected attack upon their comrade had con- 
firmed the warning which Governor Dunmore had 
sent by the two scouts, and not only did no one 
want to remain, but all were eager to be gone at 
once. 

“We must start to-night,” said MacHale, the 
oldest of the party. “We must not remain!” 

“Not to-night,” said Daniel Boone quietly. 

“Why not?” 

“It is as necessary for us to know our way as it is 
for us to retreat. ” 

“But you found your way here! Why can you 
not find it when you go back?” 

“I can,” replied Boone quietly. “It is not for 
myself I fear. I would not be the leader of a party 
unfamiliar with the woods and facing what we 
must if we leave here in the night. You must be 
[ 96 ] 


A TERRIFIED BAND 

prepared to start as soon as the gray of dawn 
appears. ” 

“But we want to go before!” persisted the 
surveyor. 

Boone quietly shook his head and gave no further 
explanation. The matter was decided, and plainly 
the scout thought there was nothing more to be 
said. Ignoring the anger as well as the alarm of 
the surveyors, the great scout at once busied him- 
self in preparing for the departure which would not 
take place until the following morning. The ser- 
vices of Boone, however, were not required in car- 
ing for the wounded surveyor, because life had fled 
before the party regained the settlement. 

There was a hasty burial in the dim light, and 
then Boone bade his companions obtain such sleep 
as they could, he himself preparing to serve as guard 
throughout the night. 

At last, however, he consented to the pleadings 
of Peleg and permitted the lad to keep watch 
during the earlier hours. As soon as this had been 
decided Boone cast himself upon the ground and, 
apparently confiding in the ability of Peleg to pro- 
tect the camp, was soon sleeping soundly. 

Just before daybreak the entire band departed 
from the Falls of the Ohio. In advance went 
Daniel Boone as guide, while Peleg was to serve as 
the rear guard. 


[97] t 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


“It is a long race,” the scout explained to his 
companions. “We have four hundred miles to 
cross before we arrive at the settlement on the 
Clinch River. Our safety depends largely upon 
the promptness with which you do my bidding. 
If there is one of you who is not willing to obey me 
in every particular I shall greatly prefer to have 
him go by himself. ” 

Every member of the party, however, assured 
the scout that his word was to be law and that 
every one would implicitly follow his directions 
throughout the long journey. When daylight came 
it was manifest in the faces of the surveyors that 
the terror of the forest was still strong upon them. 
Every man was armed, and every one carried a 
small pack upon his back. 

It was impossible to make as good time on the 
return as had been made by Boone and Peleg in the 
journey to the Falls. However, both hunters were 
urgent and seldom stopped even when heavy storms 
came upon them. 

At last, when the long journey had been safely 
made, and the settlement on the Clinch River had 
been gained, the spirits of the surveyors revived, 
although they were free to declare that it was the 
care and wisdom of Boone and his young com- 
panion which had brought them safely through the 
wilderness. 


[ 98 ] 


A TERRIFIED BAND 

Nearly eight hundred miles had been covered by 
the two scouts in their long journey, and only sixty- 
two days had been required to complete it. 

Boone and his companion, however, were not to 
be permitted to rest long. Less than a week had 
elapsed after their return when Boone called Peleg 
aside one morning and explained to him that a 
new project, and one still more perilous than that 
through which they had safely come, was now to be 
undertaken. 


[ 99 ] 


CHAPTER XI 


THE ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 

P ELEG,” said the great scout, “Governor 
Dunmore has sent another request to me.” 
“Has he?” inquired Peleg eagerly. 

In spite of the perils and labours of the long 
journey which had been made to the Falls of the 
Ohio, Peleg was eager to be with Daniel Boone 
wherever he might be. The boy’s admiration for 
his friend had increased with every passing day. 
The coolness and calmness of the great scout, his 
gentleness and consideration of others, his fear- 
lessness in time of peril, the readiness with which 
he met every event, and above all the conviction 
which held him that he was divinely called to be a 
pathfinder for the coming generations, all had 
made a deep impression upon his young companion. 
Peleg was not without hope, too, that somehow he 
was coming to hold a place in the interest and affec- 
tion of the man which once had been held by his son 
James. 

“Yes,” continued Boone thoughtfully, “the 
Governor has given me the command of three 
[ 100 ] 


ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 


garrisons in the campaign which is to be made 
against the Shawnees. ” 

“When do you go?” queried Peleg. 

“Immediately — that is, if I can persuade you 
to look after my family while I am absent. Israel 
is beginning to feel that he is almost old enough to 
take the place of his brother James, but I shall feel 
very much more at ease if I can go with the assur- 
ance that you will be looking out for the welfare of 
my wife and children.” 

Striving to repress the disappointment which he 
felt at the words of his friend, Peleg said quietly, 
“You know, sir, that I shall be willing to do all in 
my power for you at any time. I do not know, 
but ” 

The rare smile known only to his closest friends 
appeared for a moment on the strong face of the 
hunter as he shook his head and said: “Nay, Peleg, 
not this time. I fancy there will be other and 
perhaps greater work soon to be done, and in that 
you shall have your share. The time is coming 
when I hope to take my family again to that 
marvellous region I have found in Kantuckee. 
No land I have ever seen can compare with 
it. There I would live and there I would die. 
Meanwhile I must do my part in trying to 
make the lives of these hardly beset settlers a 
little safer. ” 


[101] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“You may depend upon me to do my best,” 
said Peleg cordially. 

“That is all I need to know, lad, and I shall be at 
ease while I am gone. ” 

The great scout immediately departed from the 
little shop which Peleg had built and in which he 
was accustomed to make or repair the various uten- 
sils used by the household of Daniel Boone. Here 
he had fashioned Singing Susan, and in this place he 
had rebuilt his gun after his return from the long 
journey he had made with the scout and in which, as 
we know, the rifle had suffered from the blow of the 
tomahawk which the huge Indian had hurled at him. 

A moment Peleg stood in the doorway watching 
the scout as he departed. The expression of the 
lad’s face plainly showed his love and admiration 
for the man. The calm courage of Boone, softened 
as it was by his gentleness and guided by his 
prudence, was crowned by a marvellous modesty. 
His robust, somewhat uncouth body showed the 
great strength of the hunter, while it concealed 
his quickness. His manner was dignified, almost 
cold, so silent and quiet was he under ordinary 
circumstances. His face, however, homely though 
it was, was at times lighted by an expression that 
was exceedingly kind and tender. He seldom spoke, 
and almost never of himself, except in reply to 
direct questions. 


[ 102 ] 


ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 

Several times during the months that followed 
Daniel Boone returned to the little settlement on 
the Clinch, to visit his family and make certain of 
their safety. On each occasion he was warm in his 
expressions of gratitude to Peleg for the care which 
he was taking of those who were in a measure 
dependent upon him. 

There was work to be done every day, and the 
time passed rapidly for the young scout. One 
day, while he was busy in his little shop fashioning 
a new hunting knife, he was suddenly interrupted 
by the voice of Mrs. Boone. “ Peleg! Peleg! ” she 
called. “Come! Come!” 

Instantly running toward the log house, Peleg was 
met by the frightened woman, who, touching him on 
thearm,said: “ Do you hear that sound? Whatisit?” 

Peleg turned abruptly toward the log school- 
house and listened intently. From within the rude 
little building sounds such as he never before had 
heard were issuing. There seemed to be snarls and 
growls such as a wild beast might have emitted, 
and mingled with these were cries and screams as 
of some one in dire distress. 

A moment served to convince the young scout 
that either Schoolmaster Hargrave was in trouble, 
or some of the school children were in peril; and he 
darted into his little shop, returning with Singing 
Susan in his hands. 


[ 103 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Swiftly as he ran toward the little building, 
which was not more than two hundred and fifty feet 
away, when he arrived he discovered that already 
several of the women from the settlement were 
there in advance of him, and with terror-stricken 
faces were looking first within the schoolhouse, and 
then to the road for help. 

“What is it?” demanded Peleg, as he ran to the 
door. 

“We do not know. We cannot tell,” answered 
one of the women. “It may be evil spirits. ” She 
was almost hysterical, and convinced that he could 
obtain no information from her, Peleg pushed back 
the door and entered the room. 

The sight which greeted his eyes was more per- 
plexing than startling. He saw Schoolmaster Har- 
grave leaning against one corner of the rude desk 
over which he presided, his face plainly expressing 
agony or fear; Peleg was unable to determine which 
feeling predominated. 

“What is it, Master Hargrave?” called the boy 
anxiously. 

In reply no articulate words were spoken; but a 
scream was followed by a groan, and in the midst of 
it all were also sounds like the gasping and snarling 
of some wild beast. The suffering of the man was 
manifest, but the cause was nowhere to be seen. 

There flashed into the mind of the young hunter 

[ 104 ] 


ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 

the suggestion which Mistress Horan had made 
that evil spirits were the cause of the commotion. 
Such beliefs were not uncommon at the time, and 
although Peleg had never shared in the super- 
stitions of the more ignorant people, nevertheless 
the mystery of the terrifying sounds, as well as the 
expression of Schoolmaster Hargrave’s face, caused 
even the young hunter to hesitate. 

“What is it, Master Hargrave?” he shouted, for 
the uproar still continued. 

“Oh-h-h-h! Help me! Help me!” 

The cries of the schoolmaster were interrupted 
by strange noises, that still appeared to come from 
within the desk. Moans and cries and snarls, 
such as a wild beast might have emitted, were 
plainly to be distinguished in the midst of the 
uproar. 

Peleg had stopped a few feet in front of the desk, 
and in amazement was watching the man before 
him. Apparently the schoolmaster was struggling 
and striving with some unseen body or person, and 
with intense effort he had grasped both sides of the 
desk and held it with all his strength, as if he was 
fearful it might escape. In one hand he also held 
a cylindrical ruler. 

At this moment Mrs. Horan, who had gained 
sufficient courage to enter the building, advanced 
to Peleg’s side. “I fear ’tis sick the man is,” she 
[ 105 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


said. Turning to the schoolmaster she suggested 
in a loud whisper: “If ’tis colic you are suffering 
from, Master Hargrave, I would recommend ” 

Her recommendation, however, was interrupted 
by a terrible scream from the suffering man. 

“ ’Tis good for you,” said the kind-hearted 
woman once more. The schoolmaster, however, 
still writhed as if in great agony and looked at the 
woman with an expression that might have quieted 
the tongue of a less courageous woman than Mrs. 
Horan. 

“Why do you cling to the desk in that manner? ” 
demanded the woman. 

The agony in the expression of the schoolmas- 
ter’s face seemed to be deepened by the question, 
but he made no response. 

“What’s the matter, Master Hargrave?” de- 
manded the woman once more. “ ’Tis Peleg and I 
who are here to help you.” 

Suddenly from the lips of the tormented man 
came the cry, “I have caught a cat!” Perspiration 
was streaming from his face, and his manner, ex- 
pressive of fright, agony, and fatigue combined, 
made his words scarcely recognizable. 

Peleg glanced behind him and saw that many 
more of the neighbours had arrived and were 
curiously standing within the room at a safe dis- 
tance from the desk, watching the actions of the 
[ 106 ] 


ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 


man, who still writhed and twisted as he clung to 
the desk in front of him. 

The young hunter darted around the corner of 
the rude desk, to discover the cause of all the 
trouble. He first saw that a part of the clothing 
of the unfortunate man had been torn from his 
body, which was pressed against the edge of the 
desk. Closer inspection showed that the teeth 
of a huge “cat,” or lynx, were fastened in the side 
of the schoolmaster. Bringing his gun to his 
shoulder the scout was about to fire, when the 
fear of Master Hargrave became stronger even 
than his sufferings. 

“Don’t shoot! Don’t shoot! You will hit me! 
Oh-h-h-h!” he screamed, still striving to hold his 
adversary against the edge of the desk. 

Disregarding the appeal, Peleg fired, and after 
a few confused struggles, the huge cat was lifeless. 

Still the schoolmaster held the body in its place, 
however, and when his sympathetic friends drew 
him back they were horrified to discover that the 
jaws of the dead lynx were locked about one of his 
ribs. Several minutes elapsed before the man was 
freed from this death grip. 

Meanwhile the assembly in the room had in- 
creased, and several children that had been brought 
by their mothers lifted up their voices to add to the 
general confusion. 


[ 107 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

In the midst of it all, Mrs. Horan was not to be 
denied the satisfaction of her curiosity. Pressing 
more closely upon the man who now had been 
placed on one of the rude benches almost in a 
fainting condition, she said: “I thought at first, 
Master Hargrave, that it was spirits, but now I 
see it was just a cat. Why did you fight the lynx 
in that way?” 

Ignoring his suffering, the schoolmaster man- 
aged to gasp out a tolerably full explanation : 

“What do you suppose? I was sitting alone at 
my desk, writing copy for the children to use on 
the morrow, when I heard a noise at the door and 
saw this enormous cat with her forefeet upon the 
step, every hair standing erect and her eyes shining 
as if they were on fire. My position behind the 
desk at first concealed me from her sight, but a 
slight motion of my chair revealed my presence, 
and in a moment the cat and I were each looking 
into the eyes of the other.” 

Master Hargrave stopped to recover his breath, 
and aware of the interest of his hearers, for all the 
visitors now had gathered about him, he resumed 
his story: “I had heard much from hunters con- 
cerning the power of the human eye to quell the 
fury of wild beasts. Accordingly, I frowned sav- 
agely at my visitor. Apparently, however, she 
was not alarmed. Her eyes flashed fire and she 
[ 108 ] 


ADVENTURE OF THE SCHOOLMASTER 

began to gnash her teeth, seemingly bent upon 
serious hostilities. Aware of my danger, I imme- 
diately made great haste and snatched this cylin- 
drical ruler from the desk, but the wildcat was too 
quick for me.” 

“ Why didn’t you hit her?” 

“I had nothing but the ruler with which to 
strike; besides, she was too quick. Springing upon 
me with all the proverbial ferocity and activity of 
her tribe, she fastened upon my side with her teeth 
and began to rend and tear with her claws like 
unto a fury. In vain did I strive to disengage her. 
Her teeth seemed to be fastened about my ribs, and 
all my efforts served but to enrage her the more. 

“When I saw the blood flowing so copiously 
from my wounded side I became seriously alarmed, 
and as a last resort threw myself upon the edge of 
the desk and with the entire weight of my body 
pressed the animal against a sharp corner. It was 
at this moment that the cat began to utter the most 
discordant cries to which I ever listened, and as 
doubtless I was somewhat excited at the time and 
lost a measure of my self-control, I have no ques- 
tion that we engaged in a duet that must have re- 
sounded loudly throughout the settlement.” 

“That’s enough of the story,” said Peleg. “We 
have killed the cat and we shall now take you and 
put you in bed.” 


[ 109 ] 


CHAPTER XII 


AN ATTACK 

S EVERAL weeks elapsed before the school- 
master recovered sufficiently from his 
wounds to enable him to resume his task. 
It was now March, 1775, and Daniel Boone had 
returned to the settlement on the Clinch. The 
task which Governor Dunmore had assigned him 
had been accomplished. He found Peleg and the 
members of his family engaged in their prepa- 
rations for the spring work. 

At the close of the first day after his home- 
coming, the great scout once more had an in- 
terview with Peleg. “I have just come from 
Watage,” he explained when no one was near, 4 4 where 
there has been an assembly of the Cherokees. I 
went at the request of a gentleman named Hen- 
derson, who is acting for several other men as well 
as for himself. He desired me to represent him in 
the purchase of land south of the river of Kan- 
tuckee. I did as he requested, and arrangements 
for the purchase of all the land as far as the Ten- 
nessee River were completed.” 

[ 110 ] 


AN ATTACK 


“ Why did Mr. Henderson ” 

“Colonel Henderson,” broke in the scout; “Col- 
onel Richard Henderson.” 

“Why did Colonel Richard Henderson,” re- 
peated Peleg, “and the other gentlemen wish to 
purchase so much land?” 

“Because they had learned of the fertility of the 
soil through the reports which my brother and 
I had given them. In a way I am to be their 
agent.” 

“Did the Cherokees sell to him?” 

“They did. I fancy they were glad to part with 
an empty title for a solid though moderate recom- 
pense. Trouble arose, though, when Colonel Hen- 
derson and his friends prepared to take possession, 
relying upon the validity of the deed which the 
Indians had given them. Unfortunately, the land 
lies within the limits of Virginia, according to the old 
charter which King James gave, and I understand 
that the Virginians are claiming for themselves the 
privilege of purchasing the title to all land which 
the Indians held within the limits of their state. 
Already the treaty of Colonel Henderson has been 
pronounced null and void as far as he is con- 
cerned, but the Virginians declare that the title 
given by the Cherokees is valid, and that they will 
assume the rights. That is a very peculiar method 
of dealing, according to my light. But ’tis not 
[ 111 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

concerning that, lad, that I would speak to you 
to-day.” 

The scout was silent a moment, and Peleg, in- 
terested far more than his quiet manner betrayed, 
looked eagerly into the face of his friend, waiting for 
him to explain. 

“I agreed,” resumed Boone, “to take a band of 
men with me and mark out or clear a road to this 
region in Kantuckee.” 

“A road?” asked Peleg in surprise. 

“Yes, a road over which packhorses and wag- 
ons can be driven. It will require patience and 
much labour, but the reward will be great. When- 
ever I think of that marvellous country and of the 
possibilities contained in it for families like my 
own, I am eager to open the way to it. I am auth- 
orized by Colonel Henderson to say that he will pay 
thirty-three cents per day to every man whom I 
may select to be of our company.” 

“When do we go?” inquired Peleg eagerly. 

“On the day after to-morrow. How is Singing 
Susan?” inquired Boone with a smile. 

“She is doing famously. I have gained a repu- 
tation in the settlement for being a better shot 
than I would be warranted in claiming to be, un- 
less I had the song of Susan to help me.” 

“That is good,” said Boone cordially. “Now 
if you can secure an axe that will render you as 
[. 11 *] 


AN ATTACK 


efficient service in its way as Singing Susan does 
in hers, you will be well equipped for our expedi- 
tion. It is important that we make haste, if the 
way is to be opened in time for settlers to sow any 
crops this spring.” 

Hard as it was for Daniel Boone to leave his 
family again in charge of Israel and Samuel, never- 
theless his strong feeling that he was simply an 
instrument being used to further the advance of 
the rapidly growing nation in the American col- 
onies was sufficient to induce him to accept this 
task. In addition, his wife shared the same con- 
viction. She, too, was eager for him to continue his 
labours, and in spite of the anxiety she would suffer 
during his absence, she urged him to accept the offer 
which Colonel Henderson had made. 

At the appointed time a band of twenty-five 
men, every one fully armed and all equipped with 
axes, departed from the settlement on the Clinch. 
Confidence in their leader and the hope that not 
only would they be able to open a way into the 
marvellous land, but that their own families also 
might share in the reward, made all the men eager 
to go. It was not believed that the task would re- 
quire many weeks, but the necessity of preparing 
the soil and planting some crops before the summer 
came was an inducement for haste. 

There were places where trees had to be felled, 
[ 113 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

and the ringing of the axes was heard all the day 
long. In other regions, however, very little labour 
was required, because the road, as it was selected, 
led in its winding course around many open 
ledges and through sparsely wooded passes of the 
hills and mountains. 

Nearly three weeks passed and the hardy band 
of hunters and woodsmen was drawing near the 
region which they were seeking. They had not 
been molested by the Indians, and were beginning 
to congratulate themselves that they were to escape 
the perils which every day threatened them. 

Without warning, one day, however, above the 
ringing of the axes were heard the wild cries of 
the red men. Darting from the woods, shouting 
and brandishing their guns and hatchets, the In- 
dians suddenly appeared. Dodging from tree to 
tree and firing upon the startled white men, they 
seemed to be on all sides at once. 

Instantly the coolness and courage of Daniel 
Boone became invaluable. Though many of his 
comrades had been surprised and terrified by the 
sudden onslaught, the great scout had held him- 
self prepared for the present emergency. 

“Run for the trees!” shouted Boone. “Run! 
Hold your fire until you gain cover and then give 
the rascals your best!” As- Boone looked out 
from his own shelter after his rifle had been dis- 
[ 114 ] 


AN ATTACK 


charged, he saw several of his companions lying 
dead or wounded upon the ground. 

Calmly yet swiftly Boone darted from the pro- 
tection of the forest, and lifting one of the men in 
his arms bore him back within shelter. 

The example of the leader, mindful of the needs 
of others in the hour of his own peril, inspired his 
companions to similar action, and, in the midst of 
all the turmoil and danger, the other wounded 
men were rescued. It soon was discovered, how- 
ever, that three of the fallen men were already 
dead. 

The temporary withdrawal of the warriors to the 
forest left the field free once more, and Boone 
turned to his companions and said, 4 4 Come with 
me, every one!” 

Instantly his followers responded, and, dashing to 
the place where their companions had fallen, they 
bore the bodies back to a place of safety, thankful to 
find that they had not yet been mutilated. 

There was no time for ceremony or for lamenta- 
tions, and the three who had fallen to rise no more 
were hastily buried in one grave by their comrades. 

The unexpected attack, following as it had the 
long days of quiet, was seriously disturbing to the 
roadmakers. That evening there were no camp- 
fires, and guards were established to watch through 
the night. 


[ 115 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

When morning came the alarm had not been re- 
peated, and many were persuaded that the assault 
of the previous day was merely the act of a desper- 
ate band which had attacked the settlers without 
any preconceived plan. Nevertheless Daniel Boone 
declared that it was necessary to maintain a guard 
throughout the day. 

The labour was entered into with zeal, and 
though a renewal of the attack was not made, 
thoughts of the new peril were in the minds of 
every man, and made all serious. At the request 
of his followers Boone devoted most of his time to 
scouting in the nearby region, a duty which he 
insisted upon sharing with his younger companion, 
Peleg. 

The sun had dropped below the borders of the 
forest, and the men were congratulating them- 
selves that the day had passed without a renewal 
of hostilities, when suddenly both scouts were seen 
running swiftly toward the place where the men 
had encamped for the night. 

This startling sight was sufficient to arouse every 
member of the party. Every man seized his gun and 
ran for the shelter of some huge tree. 

Boone was wildly gesticulating as he drew near, 
but his gestures were misunderstood by his friends. 
Before either scout was able to regain the place 
where the pioneers were hiding, there was another 
[ 116 ] 





“ Boone quickly rallied his startled followers, and when 
the red men returned the hardy settlers were ready and 
awaiting their coming ” 



AN ATTACK 


wild whoop and a band of Indians larger than 
that which had been seen the previous day darted 
from the woods in the rear of the settlers. Before 
they were able to return the unlooked-for fire, two 
of their number fell dead from the bullets of their 
enemies, while three more were wounded. 

Like a flash the Indians were gone again. But 
Boone quickly rallied his startled followers and when 
the red men returned, as they did within a few min- 
utes, appearing from another section of the forest, 
the hardy settlers were ready and awaiting their 
coming. 

Once more had the careful preparation of Boone 
for what he thought was likely to occur saved his 
followers and himself from peril. 

Several of the Indians fell under the deadly fire 
of the white men, and with loud cries and lamen- 
tations the warriors dragged their fallen comrades 
into the forest and once more disappeared. 

44 Never have I seen the Indians so savage as in 
these two attacks,” said Boone soberly to Peleg, 
after guards had been established for the night 
and the men had stretched themselves on their 
blankets to obtain such sleep as was possible in the 
midst of the threatening dangers. “They seem 
almost beside themselves with rage.” 

44 Do you still plan to go on?” 

44 1 shall go on,” said Boone simply. “The way 
[ 117 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

must be opened for our people to gain some of the 
advantages of this wonderful region toward which 
we are moving. The tribes hereabout are a strange 
people. I have never known Indians more hos- 
pitable than are the Cherokees and Shawnees. If 
one brave enters the wigwam of another, even if it 
be that of a stranger, he is deeply offended if he is 
not given an invitation to eat, though he may just 
have had a meal at his own wigwam. Nor is it 
sufficient on these occasions that the ordinary 
food be offered him. You know the Indians live 
mostly on venison and hominy, but when a visi- 
tor comes, sugar, bear’s oil, honey, and rum, if they 
have it, are to be set before him.” 

“Suppose they do not have anything in the 
house to eat?” 

“Then the fact is stated quietly. It is at once 
accepted as sufficient. I was in a wigwam not 
long ago where the visitor thought the host was 
not as hospitable as he ought to be and he took 
him severely to task. He said: ‘You have be- 
haved just like a Dutchman. I shall excuse you 
this time, for you are young, and have been brought 
up close to the white people, but you must re- 
member to behave like a warrior and never be 
caught in such little actions. Great actions alone 
can ever make a great man.’ They are a strange 
people,” added Boone thoughtfully. “I saw a 
[ 118 ] 


AN ATTACK 


white man some time ago trying to help in carrying 
some game which the warriors had shot. I shall 
never forget how the Indians laughed when, after 
the squaws and the boys had started to bring back 
the meat, this white man took a large piece of 
buffalo meat on his own back. After he had gone 
two or three miles he found it was becoming too 
heavy for him and he threw it down. Then I 
saw one of the squaws, laughing as if it was a huge 
joke, take the meat which the white man had 
dropped and put it on her own pack, which al- 
ready was as large as that of the man, and carry 
the double burden back to camp.” 

“They are not as swift as our men, though,” 
suggested Peleg. 

“Not for a short distance,” assented Boone, 
“but they can keep up a pace for an almost in- 
credible length of time. I have known Indians 
who could run twelve or fourteen hours without a 
morsel of food, and then, after a light meal and a 
short rest, start again and go as far as they had 
before they stopped.” 

“They never do that in fighting, though.” 

“ No, they may keep up a warfare for many years, 
but they never make a prolonged attack. They 
like a sudden dash such as they made upon us and in 
which those poor fellows were killed. Peleg, I 
fear the morrow. The Shawnees that are watching 

[ 119 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


us see our axes, and they are sure now that we are 
trying to enter their hunting grounds and take 
away their lands. We shall have serious trouble, I 
fear. ” 

And the following day Boone’s fears were con- 
firmed. 


CHAPTER XIII 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE 

T HERE was no open attack by the Indians 
such as had been made previously, though 
the yells of the warriors were frequently 
heard in the distance. It was plain that they were 
striving to terrorize the hardy settlers and make 
them turn back on their way. 

One of the men who had been stationed as a 
guard was shot early in the morning and his muti- 
lated body was not found until Daniel Boone, 
making a tour of the camp, discovered what had 
befallen his companion. 

Returning to the camp, Boone summoned his 
men, and as soon as they were assembled, said to 
them: “We must stop our work on the road for a 
time and build a fort.” 

There was an expression of consternation on the 
faces of some of his comrades as they heard this 
quiet statement from the scout, and, aware of what 
was in their minds, though no one spoke, Daniel 
Boone continued; “It will not require many days. 
I think a fortnight will be sufficient for us to build 

[m] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

such a fort as will protect us. We are now almost 
as far on our way as we wish to go. We will begin 
the work at once. ” 

Whatever disappointment or fears may have 
been in the minds of his companions, no one made 
any open protest, and the task immediately was 
begun. Certain of the men were assigned to the 
felling of trees, others dug trenches and set the logs 
in the stockade, which was erected first. 

When the stockade had been completed, various 
cabins were built wherein the men might live if 
they were compelled to seek the refuge of the fort. 

The defences were erected near a spring of water 
that promised to be never-failing. Nearby was 
the river, so close to the fort as to enable the de- 
fenders to escape if flight became necessary. And 
yet the fort was sufficiently far from the banks to 
prevent an approach by their enemies without be- 
ing discovered. 

So steadily did the men labour that Boone’s 
prophecy was fulfilled, and when fourteen days had 
elapsed the little fort was declared to be ready for 
occupancy. The stockade was strong and had been 
made of the stakes fashioned from the trees. One 
end of each log was sharpened and then all were 
driven into the ground side by side; portholes 
being provided at frequent intervals. 

A feeling of intense relief came to the hardly 

[ 122 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE 

beset men when the work was completed. The 
supreme thought, however, in the mind of the 
leader, was voiced when he explained to Peleg the 
following day: “It is now April, and I must go 
back to the settlement on the Clinch for my family.” 

“Alone?” inquired Peleg quickly. 

“Yes, alone. I must not take one man away 
from the party here, and I shall be doubly anxious 
for you all while I am gone; but the time has come 
when I may think of my family and myself. In 
this wonderful land I, too, would make my home.” 

“But will you dare to come back with your fam- 
ily with only you and Israel to protect them?” 

Boone’s face lighted up with the rare smile 
which occasionally appeared upon it as he said: 
“There will be others, many others, I hope, who will 
join us on our way. ” 

“ I never knew the Indians to be so savage as they 
are now,” suggested Peleg anxiously. 

“That is true,” said Boone, “and one cannot 
altogether blame them. They seem to be well-nigh 
mad in their hatred of us because we have begun to 
build our homes in the land which they planned to 
keep as their own. If it were not for their fear 
of the ‘Long Knives,’ as they term us, I fancy 
they would make a desperate assault very soon. 
As it is, however, they have a wholesome feeling 
of fear mingled with their anger, and although you 
[ 123 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

will have to be continually on your guard, I do not 
believe they will venture to attack the fort while I 
am gone. ” 

Peleg made no reply, and the scout, acting as if 
the last word had been spoken, soon after set forth 
on his long journey to the Clinch. 

During the absence of their leader the men con- 
tinued their labours, felling the trees and clearing 
the land, until in the immediate vicinity of the fort 
sufficient ground had been made tillable to enable 
them to plant the few seeds which Boone had in- 
sisted should be brought with them. 

The days now were warm, and the delights of the 
marvellous climate were appreciated by all the men. 

The only event of special interest that occurred 
during the absence of the scout was the coming of 
Sam Oliver. As unconcerned as if he had long been 
a member of the company and had earned his 
thirty-three cents per day for his labours, the hunter 
entered the fort one night and composedly received 
the warm greetings which were given him. It was 
well known that the newcomer was a famous shot, 
and the coming of even one man strengthened the 
little garrison not a little. 

The general line of the defence of the fort was 
at once mapped out by Sam, who without a word 
assumed the position of leader. It was he who 
arranged the details and the nightly guards which 
[ 124 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE 

were maintained, and it was his word which decided 
any dispute that arose among the men. 

One day Peleg was on guard in the adjacent 
forest. His watch was almost ended and he was 
about to return to the fort, when he was startled to 
behold an Indian approaching with the palms of 
both hands extended. 

Holding Singing Susan in readiness for instant 
use, and glancing keenly about him into the adjacent 
forest to make sure that his visitor was unaccom- 
panied, Peleg waited patiently for the stranger to 
approach. 

As the warrior drew near Peleg looked at him 
with increasing astonishment. Dressed in the In- 
dian garb, the warrior, who seemed to be only about 
twenty years of age, nevertheless had no features 
like those of the neighbouring tribes. Tanned, the 
stranger undoubtedly was, but nevertheless his skin 
did not have the bronze colouring of the Indian. 
His figure and even his walk were more like the 
white man’s. And yet in every other point the 
stranger apparently was of the Indian race. 

As he drew near Peleg, his face was lighted by a 
smile as he said, “ Me broder. Me white Shawnee.” 

Peleg did not respond, although his astonishment 
was increased by the speech of the approaching 
warrior. 

“Me wan’ go home. No fader. Me Shawnee 
[1251 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

fader. Me wan 9 white fader. White moder dead. 
White fader dead. No Shawnee fader some more.” 

The puzzling statements were followed by some 
words unintelligible to Peleg, though he concluded 
that they were spoken in the Shawnee tongue. 

“Do you want to see Daniel Boone?” he in- 
quired. 

Gesticulating forcefully, the young man inquired, 
44 He me fader?” 

“No.” 

44 White fader dead. White moder dead. Shaw- 
nee warriors kill me fader. Kill moder. Many 
moons ago. ” 

“How many?” 

A puzzled expression for a moment appeared on 
the stranger’s face, and then, comprehending the 
meaning of the question, he opened and closed his 
hands so many times that, although Peleg was un- 
able to count the number of moons indicated, he 
concluded that the Shawnee was approximately of 
his own age. 

44 Me live in Shawnee wigwam many moons. Me 
Shawnee. Me white Shawnee. Me have Shawnee 
fader and Shawnee broder,” and he held up two 
fingers to indicate the number of his brothers. 

44 What are you doing here? What do you want?” 
demanded Peleg sharply. He was mystified by 
the statements which had been made and was fear- 
[ 126 ] 


“ One of the men who had been stationed as a guard 
was shot early in the morning ” 








































































































THE WHITE SHAWNEE 

ful of some trap or treachery on the part of his 
visitor or his companions, who might even then be 
watching from the nearby forest. 

“Me fader, me broder, me go,” the visitor 
replied, pointing to himself. “All go trap many 
beaver, many mink, many muskrat,” he added, 
making a circle with his hand to indicate his in- 
ability to count the pelts which had been taken. 
“ Me broder he wan ’ go on warpath. He wan’ help 
drive palefaces out Kantuckee. Me fader he say 
he go,” nodding his head many times to emphasize 
his statement. “But one night many owls scream 
and cry. He say then no go. Me broder he say 
go. Me fader say yes. ” 

“Where are they now?” 

The young stranger gazed earnestly into the 
face of his questioner, and at last, apparently com- 
prehending his question, turned and waved his 
hand toward the forest to indicate that the men to 
whom he had referred were far away. 

“Why are you here? Why do you not go with 
them?” 

“ Me wan 5 see white faces some more. Me wan 9 
find white broder. Me white Shawnee, where go? 
Must see paleface wigwam.” 

For a moment Peleg was silent as he gazed 
earnestly into the face of the young man who had 
so strongly impressed him. He was convinced 
[ 127 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

that he was indeed white, and he concluded that he 
must have been adopted by the Indians many years 
ago. As a consequence of his association with the 
Shawnees, doubtless he had almost forgotten the 
language of his own people. 

In his statement words unknown to Peleg were 
spoken, but he had understood enough to convince 
him that either the white Shawnee was speaking 
the truth, or else was trying to set some trap into 
which the defenders of the fort might be drawn. 

“Come with me,” said the young scout finally. 
As they turned toward the fort they met Sam 
Oliver, who stopped and gazed in surprise at 
Peleg’s companion, and laughed scornfully when 
he heard the story of the stranger. 

“You say you and your Shawnee father and 
brother buried the canoe in which you came down 
the river?” demanded the hunter brutally as he 
turned upon the visitor. 

“Bury canoe.” 

“Then you take us straight to the place where 
it is. I know well enough you are trying to play 
some sneaking game on us, and if you are, you will 
be the first one to suffer for it. If you try to lead 
us into any trap, no matter what happens to us, 
I will put a bullet into you.” 

“No go,” pleaded the young warrior. 

“You must go!” retorted Sam Oliver harshly. 

[ 128 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE 


Peleg sympathized with the stranger. He un- 
derstood, he thought, the desire of the returning 
white man to shield his foster-father and brother. 
The young hunter was now convinced that his 
visitor had spoken truthfully. 

“Sam,” he ventured to suggest, “this young 
brave was stolen when he was a little child, and 
he has lived with his Shawnee father ever since. 
He doesn’t want to betray him. You cannot blame 
him for that, can you?” 

“There is only one way to deal with the var- 
mints!” retorted Sam hotly. “You might just 
as well try to make a pet out of a nest of rattlesnakes 
as to try to be friends with an Indian. No, sir! 
This — whatever he is, white man, or red man — 
he must prove what he has said, and the only way 
for him to do it is to take us to the place where he 
pretends that canoe is buried in the ground.” 

The brutal manner of the hunter apparently 
had made a deep impression upon the stranger. 
With manifest reluctance he finally consented to 
conduct the party to the place where the canoe was 
buried. It was well known among the settlers 
that the Indians, after their voyages on the river, 
buried their light canoes to prevent them from 
being warped by sun and rain. 

“You go where owl cry. Owl scream, me 

fader — iron ” The stranger stopped as if 

[ 129 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

he was unable to recollect the word he wished to 
use, making motions with his hands to describe 
what he wished to say. 

Peleg suggested, “Was it an iron kettle?” 

A vigorous nod from the stranger indicated that 
was the word he was trying to recall, and he con- 
tinued, “Me fader hide iron kettle in hole in tree. 
Me show you.” 

“You wait here,” ordered Sam, “while I get 
two or three more men and we will soon look up 
that kettle.” 

Peleg suspected that the white Shawnee, in 
order to delay the quest of the hidden canoe and 
thereby give his foster-father and brother an 
opportunity to escape from the region, had sug- 
gested a visit to the tree where the cry of the owl 
had alarmed his father. 

In a brief time, however, Sam and his compan- 
ions returned, and the hunter roughly ordered the 
stranger to lead the way. 


[ 130 ] 


CHAPTER XIV 


THE HIDDEN CANOE 

W HILE Sam Oliver had been gone to the 
fort to secure a few of his comrades to 
accompany him, the young Indian, or 
white, or white Indian — Peleg was uncertain to 
which class his visitor really belonged — entered 
with apparent confidence into conversation with the 
young scout. In his broken English he related 
many things concerning the life which he had lived 
in the wigwam of his foster father. 

Peleg was impressed by the increasing facility 
with which the white Shawnee, as the young brave 
preferred to call himself, was using the language 
of the whites. 

It may have been that the words he now heard 
recalled to his mind expressions which had almost 
faded from his memory. At all events he talked 
more freely and with an increasing ability to ex- 
press himself. 

“Me fader hear owl cry. He know from strange 
cry that some die or be pris’ner. He old man. He 
’fraid. He say go back up river. Me broder he 
[ 131 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


say no. Me say no. Me fader still ’fraid, but he 
keep him promise.” 

“What was his promise?” inquired Peleg. 

“ He say he take us on warpath to help keep pale- 
faces from going into Kantuckee. He no wan’ go, 
but he say he go. We all lie down sleep. Pretty 
quick me fader wake up. Me fader wake me 
broder. Wake me, too.” 

“What was the trouble?” asked Peleg. 

“Me fader have sleep and see ” 

“What do you mean, he had a dream?” 

“That so, ” replied the visitor, nodding his head. 
“Me fader have dream.” 

“What did he dream?” 

“He say we go to Kantuckee, we die. Me fader 
cry. He no wan’ go on warpath.” 

“But you came,” suggested Peleg. 

His visitor nodded and continued: “Me fader 
say he keep him promise. But he say more. He 
say we go back to wigwam. Go quick. He good 
man. Heap good man. He keep him promise. Me 
broder say me fader mus’ keep him promise now.” 

“So you came?” 

“We go on warpath. Me fader say he go 
quick. No stay any more where we sleep.” 

“So you started right away, did you?” 

“We go on warpath all night. When light come 
we turn to place where white man build fort.” 

[ 132 ] 


THE HIDDEN CANOE 


“Are there many Shawnees here?” 

The young visitor, nodding, said: “Pretty quick, 
heap Shawnee come.” 

He held up three and then four fingers to express 
the idea that the Indian bands were advancing 
in parties of three or more, and at some prearranged 
place or by some well-known signals the scattered 
little parties would be brought together and one 
large band formed. 

The information was startling to the young scout 
and seemed to him to be altogether probable. It 
was in accordance with the well-known methods 
of Indian fighting, and agreed with experiences 
which the young hunter already had had. 

He deeply regretted the absence of the great 
leader. The gentleness and firmness, the courage 
and resource of Daniel Boone would be greatly 
needed if the Shawnees attacked the little fort. 
Boone, however, was not near and his help could 
not be relied upon. 

Meanwhile Peleg was awaiting the return of 
: Sam Oliver. He was well aware of the excellent 
qualities which the hunter possessed, and he was 
familiar also with the intense bitterness with 
which Sam looked upon the Indians. For him 
they possessed no good qualities. They were 
simply enemies of the whites and to be extermi- 
nated like the rattlesnake and the panther. He 
[ 133 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

recognized no feeling of patriotism on their part, 
and, because the method of their warfare was cruel, 
he judged their motives accordingly. 

“Me no wan’ go where canoe is,” said the young 
brave earnestly. “Me love Shawnee fader. Me 
no betray him. Him good man. Me fader kind 
to me. No wan’ him lose scalp.” 

“It is too bad,” acknowledged Peleg. He was 
distressed by the fear that Sam Oliver and his 
companions would have little mercy upon the 
Indian father to whom they were compelling the 
young man to conduct them. In his heart there 
was a desire to help the young stranger who had 
felt the call of his own people so strongly that he 
had even deserted the family which had cared for 
him since his early childhood. 

Peleg’s thoughts were interrupted by the return 
of the hunter and four of his comrades. It was 
evident that all five were suspicious of treachery, 
and also that they were determined to put the 
strange visitor’s words to the test. 

“Now, then!” ordered Sam, as he turned sharply 
upon the white Shawnee. “You take us straight 
to that place where you say your canoe was 
hid.” 

Apparently unmoved by the brutal demand, the 
young visitor answered, “Me no wan’ you hurt me 
fader. Him good fader. Him take care me.” 
[ 134 ] 


THE HIDDEN CANOE 

“Why didn’t you stay with him then?” laughed 
Sam. 

“Me wan’ see white fader’s people, too. Me 
wan’ find white moder’s people,” said the visitor 
simply. 

“You will have time enough to look them up 
after we have found out whether you are telling us 
the truth or not,” declared Sam. “I have my sus- 
picions that you are trying to get us into some 
trap, and as I told you before, if you are I shall 
fill you full of lead the first thing. If I find you 
are trying to trap us, you cannot complain if I 
do just what I tell you I shall do.” 

“Me no wan’ go,” repeated the young man. 

“You are going whether you want to go or 
not,” retorted Sam Oliver brutally. “Are you 
coming with us, Peleg? ” he inquired, turning to the 
young scout. 

“I am,” said Peleg quietly. He had made his 
decision instantly in his desire to protect or help 
the young visitor, whose suffering in the prospect 
of being compelled to betray his father had deeply 
stirred the heart of the young hunter. Aware 
that there was no escape from the demand, the 
white Shawnee turned and led the way into the 
forest. 

The men who were following him were contin- 
ually alert, suspicious as they were of the treach- 
[ 135 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

ery of their guide, and fearful of the presence of 
other Shawnees in the forest through which they 
were moving. 

The confidence of Sam Oliver, who followed 
close upon the heels of the stranger, in a measure 
strengthened the courage of his followers. 

Peleg, who was next behind the leader, was as 
observant of the hunter as he was of the signs in 
the woods. He was convinced, too, that the 
young stranger was using time either to delay his 
followers or to give them an opportunity to abandon 
their demand for him to be false to the foster-father 
who had cared for him since his childhood. 

If such thoughts had been in the mind of the 
young white Shawnee they were not expressed and 
certainly were not fulfilled. There was no escaping 
the demands of Sam Oliver and his companions. 

At last, when an hour or more had elapsed, the 
guide stopped and, raising his hand in token of 
silence, in a low voice explained that they were 
approaching the tree in which the iron kettle had 
been concealed. 

Instantly the demeanour of the settlers changed 
and they began to creep forward more stealthily. 
Every man was alert to discover the presence of 
the Indian who still might be near the place where 
the kettle had been hidden. 

After a few moments Peleg perceived two In- 
[ 136 ] 


THE HIDDEN CANOE 

dians not far before him. Both were seated be- 
fore a fire cooking some venison. One of the war- 
riors was an old man and his companion not much 
more than a boy. 

The guide discovered the two Indians at the 
same time that Peleg did and instantly he became 
greatly agitated. Once more he turned to Sam 
Oliver and in low tones begged him not to kill the 
man who had been his foster-father nor the other 
who had been his foster-brother. 

“Sam,” whispered Peleg, “it will be better for 
us just to make prisoners of these two men. I 
think we ought to do this. The boy plainly has 
spoken the truth. He did not want to betray his 
father and his brother, and you and I cannot 
blame him. Take both the Indians prisoners, but 
do not fire upon them.” 

Aware that Sam was somewhat moved by his 
plea, Peleg repeated his request more urgently 
and was almost as relieved as the guide when at 
last Sam reluctantly consented. 

In accordance with the directions of the hunter 
the band scattered to surround the place where the 
two unsuspecting Indians were cooking their din- 
ner. When all the preliminaries had been com- 
pleted, Sam Oliver stepped forward and in his 
loudest tones demanded the surrender of both 
men. At the same time his companions darted 
[ 137 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

forward, making a rush upon the unarmed war- 
riors. 

To the surprise of every one, the old Indian 
made a desperate resistance. With an almost in- 
credible quickness the Indian boy dodged his ene- 
mies and escaped to the forest. The old man, 
apparently striving to hold back the attacking 
party, resisted to the utmost of his strength until 
in his rage Sam Oliver raised his rifle to his shoulder 
and shot him. 

The recent guide, when he saw his foster-father 
fall, instantly rushed to the spot where the old man 
was lying. The aged warrior was bleeding pro- 
fusely, but he was still conscious. Flinging him- 
self upon the ground beside the prostrate body, 
with the tears streaming down his cheeks and his 
voice broken by sobs, again and again the white 
Shawnee spoke to the aged warrior. Even Sam 
Oliver was silent as he saw the grief of their guide. 

His companions indifferently watched the be- 
reaved boy, but Peleg looked away when he saw 
the old man raise his hand feebly and place it upon 
the head of his adopted son. It was a token of his 
forgiveness, although his few words were not un- 
derstood by the listening group. The meaning of 
the act, however, was clear to every one. 

Soon the old warrior breathed his last, and as 
soon as Sam Oliver was aware that the end had 
[ 138 ] 


THE HIDDEN CANOE 

come his sympathy speedily departed. Turning 
once more to the guide and ignoring the grief of the 
boy, he roughly said: “Now take us where that 
canoe is buried. The other Indian has got away 
from us, and he will probably make straight for the 
canoe. You lead us there about as fast as you 
can travel and we will try to head him off before 
he can go down the river!” 

In broken utterances the young white Shawnee 
begged the hunter not to enforce this last demand. 
“Me show where me fader was. Me fader dead. 
Me no show where broder is. Me wan’ broder 
escape. No go broder! No go broder!” he be- 
sought the hunter earnestly. 

Sam Oliver, however, was not to be turned from 
his decision. “You go with us or I shall make 
you!” he said, and in spite of Peleg’s protests he 
turned the young guide’s face to the forest and 
with many threats compelled him to lead the way. 

Two hours elapsed before they came near the 
place where the canoe had been buried. Creep- 
ing cautiously among the trees, the settlers came 
within rifle shot of the spot, and as they peered 
keenly about them no one at first was able to dis- 
cover the presence of the young Indian. 

By the direction of Oliver every man remained 
in his hiding-place waiting for the arrival of the 
Indian boy, who, Sam was convinced, would soon 
[ 139 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

come to the place. This expectation was fulfilled, 
as in about ten minutes the young Indian appeared 
and started to the sandy shore of the river. 

Without hesitation he proceeded to the spot 
where the canoe had been hidden and, as he began 
to dig the sand, the hunter ordered his companions 
to fire upon him. The reports of the five rifles 
rang out together. 

The young Shawnee leaped high into the air 
and fell dead upon the sand. Doubtless he never 
knew of the unwilling treachery of his foster- 
brother by which he and his father had lost their 
lives. 


[ 140 ] 


CHAPTER XV 


GATHERING CLOUDS 

T HE grief of the white Shawnee at the death 
of his foster-brother was pitiful to behold. 
Even Sam Oliver and his companions, 
who seldom showed any sympathy for the Indians, 
were not unmoved by his agonized cries of grief. 

In the Shawnee tongue, some words of which all 
the white men present understood, the young 
stranger poured forth his sorrows. He called upon 
the spirits of his foster-father and brother to wait 
for him in their journey to the happy hunting- 
grounds. He explained that in no way had his 
treachery been of his own choosing. In spite of 
his protest, he explained, he had been compelled 
to direct the white men to the place where those 
who were nearest and dearest to him had fallen 
before their fire. 

Several minutes elapsed and no one of the set- 
tlers spoke. Then Sam Oliver said sharply: “We 
have had enough of this! I feel just about as 
guilty as I do when I shoot a panther cub.” 
Without a further word the hunter stepped to the 
[ 141 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

place where the body of the young Indian was 
lying and scalped his victim. Even Peleg, hard- 
ened though he was to the scenes that were en- 
acted upon the border, shuddered as he saw his 
companion perform this act. 

At the urgent request of Peleg the white Shaw- 
nee was permitted to return with his newly found 
friend to bury the body of his foster-father, after 
his brother also had received decent burial at his 
hands. 

When this act, in which Peleg had aided, was 
completed, the young hunter turned to his heart- 
broken companion and said, “You must come to 
the fort with me.” 

“No go! No go!” wailed the visitor. 

“I do not blame you very much,” acknowledged 
Peleg, “but you have no other home, and you 
might just as well come with me. I am sure 
you will be treated kindly, and as soon as Daniel 
Boone comes back you need have no further fears. 
If you go back to the Shawnees they will think 
you have betrayed your father and brother. Of 
course I understand that you did not do anything 
of the kind.” 

“Me do ! Me false to me fader,” interrupted the 
white Shawnee, his lamentations breaking forth 
afresh. 

“What is your name?” abruptly demanded Peleg. 

[ 142 ] 


GATHERING CLOUDS 


The reply of his companion sounded to him very 
like Tontileaugo, but although it was repeated sev- 
eral times Peleg was unable to pronounce it dis- 
tinctly. 

“I might call you Tonti, and I might call you 
Henry. Which do you like better?” 

“No call Tonti.” 

“Then I will call you Henry. Don’t you re- 
member what your name was when you were a 
white boy?” 

“Henry” shook his head, although plainly he 
was striving to recall the name which belonged to 
the years that were now dim in his memory. 

“You come with me,” said Peleg. 

Together the two boys returned to the fort. 
Neither of them spoke until they entered within 
the stockade, where the men of the settlement were 
assembled listening to Sam Oliver’s dramatic de- 
scription of the events which had just taken place. 

The sight of the hunter seemed to revive the 
sorrow of Henry, as Peleg henceforth called the 
young stranger, and bring back recollections of his 
own, unwilling treachery to the family which had 
been kind to him since the time of his adoption into 
the tribe. 

However, Peleg did his utmost to shield his 
friend, to whom his heart went out in strong sym- 
pathy. 


[ 143 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“What you goin’ to do with your friend?” 
laughed Sam as he spoke to Peleg when the group 
at last scattered. 

“I am going to take care of him,” replied Peleg 
quietly. 

“Make a pet of him, are you? The next rattler 
I find or the next wolf ’s cub I run across I will bring 
back to you, lad, and let you make a pet of that, 
too. The only trouble is that a rattlesnake is 
kinder at heart than an Indian. ” 

Peleg shook his head but did not reply to this 
statement of the hunter. 

“It is true, what I am tellin’ you,” continued 
Sam, as if somehow he was striving to justify him- 
self. “ It’ s got to be extermination . Either you kill 
the redskins or they will kill you. There isn’t room 
for both in the same land. They are trying to kill 
us off, and I am not one to sit down quietly and 
invite them to bring their tomahawks and brain me. 
If I can get the drop on them before they can get it 
on me, that’s all to my advantage.” 

“I think Henry feels ” began Peleg. 

“Henry? Who’s Henry?” broke in Sam Oliver. 

“That’s the name I have given this boy. He 
told me what his name was in Shawnee, but I 
could not quite get it. It sounded like Tonti- 
leaugo, and I offered to call him Tonti for short, 
but he didn’t like that.” 

[ 144 ] 


GATHERING CLOUDS 

“You will live to regret the day you ever took 
him in,” warned Sam. 

“But he is a white boy,” persisted Peleg. 

“Born white, but raised an Indian. It doesn’t 
make much difference where a man is born. He 
grows to be like what he sees and is used to. He 
has been brought up to look at things through 
Indian eyes and he thinks Indian thoughts. You 
will find he will play you false before you are done 
with him. ” 

“I shall have to take my chance as to that, ” said 
Peleg. “Daniel Boone has told me to try to do 
something to help somebody every day. He told me 
to start out with that in my mind the first thing 
every morning. ” 

“You are makin’ a mistake, lad,” said Sam 
Oliver more quietly. 

It was plain to Peleg that the old hunter was 
convinced that what he said was true, and there 
had been many experiences along the border to 
justify him in his conclusion. What Sam Oliver 
had been unable to comprehend was that, much as 
the methods of the Indians in their warfare were to 
be condemned, they still were fighting for the pro- 
tection of the lands which they believed to be 
their own. 

A few days afterward Daniel Boone and his 
family arrived with their little caravan, which 
[ 145 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

included two milch cows and several pack-horses. 
The scout was hilariously greeted by the settlers, 
and without opposition at once resumed his position 
as leader of the little community. 

Every one that could share in the labour was 
busily engaged now throughout the long hours of 
the day. The sound of the axe was continually 
heard, and the few crops which had been planted 
were carefully tended, and, what is more, were 
giving promise of an abounding harvest from the 
small sowing. 

Peleg had related to the great scout the events 
which had been connected with the coming of 
Henry to the settlements. The young scout’s 
heart was still sore for his friend, who now had 
little to say to any one except Peleg. Together the 
boys toiled in the field or hunted game in the 
forests; but Henry was never stationed as a guard. 

“It is this way, lad,” said Boone, after he had 
heard the entire story. “Sam Oliver means right, 
but he has no understanding of the feelings of any 
one else. Because I shoot an Indian and he shoots 
an Indian, he thinks we both act from the same 
motive. Never yet have I raised my rifle to fire at 
an Indian without feeling in my heart that perhaps 
he might be as fully entitled to the land for which 
he is struggling as I am. I should be glad to share 
with him. The trouble is he will not share with 
[ 146 ] 


GATHERING CLOUDS 

me. There ought to be room enough here for 
us both; but, now I am sure, lad, through the 
actions of. the Indians themselves, it must be 
either white man or red man who will dwell in this 
wonderful country.” As he spoke, Daniel Boone 
looked around him at the wonderful vision that 
spread before his eyes. It was a day late in the 
summer and a slight haze rested over the forests 
and the fields. The silence which enveloped all 
things was in itself impressive. The cloudless sky 
and the colours of the trees below the hill where the 
scout and his companion were standing combined 
to impress upon their minds the marvellous beauty 
of the region. “This is destined to be a great land, 
lad, ” Boone said simply. “It is a wonderful thing 
that you and I should have a little part in opening 
it up. When I close my eyes, almost I see the 
homes that will be built here, the men and women 
who will find resting-places here; even the voices of 
the little children who will be born two hundred 
years from now are sounding in my ears. ” Chang- 
ing his tone, Boone said: “Have you seen any- 
thing in your friend to make you feel suspicious 
of him?” 

“Never!” said Peleg positively. “Have you?” 

“No. There are some men in the settlement, 
however, who are fearful that he may try to be- 
tray us when trouble comes.” 

[ 147 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“He never will,” said Peleg positively. “If 
you had been with me and seen him when Sam 
Oliver shot his foster-father and brother I am sure 
you would never suspect Henry of not being true. ” 

“That is my feeling, lad,” said Boone gently. 
“Do all in your power to prevent him from doing 
anything which might arouse the anger or even 
the suspicions of our men. ” 

“He never talks to Sam Oliver and very seldom 
to any one else. He stays with me all through the 
day, except when I am on guard. ” 

“You are welcome to bring him to our home 
any time. ” 

“To stay there?” inquired Peleg. 

“That is what I mean, lad,” replied the great 
scout, his face lighting up with the occasional smile 
that appeared upon it. “My wife and daughters 
feel toward him as I do. Do you know that they 
were the first white women ever to stand on the 
banks of the Kantuckee River?” 

“I had not thought of that,” replied Peleg. 

“There are many others coming soon. Already 
I have received word that Mrs. McGary, Mrs. 
Hogan, and Mrs. Denton are on their way here.” 

The arrival soon afterward of more than a score 
of white men to join the settlers aroused great en- 
thusiasm, because now it was confidently believed 
that, after so many had passed safely over the road- 
[ 148 ] 


GATHERING CLOUDS 

way which Boone and his companions had opened 
to the beautiful region, many more would surely fol- 
low. These expectations were soon fulfilled. 

The continued labours of the whites, however, had 
increased the intense hostility of the Indians, who 
naturally believed all these lands belonged to them. 
When they saw the settlers felling the trees and erect- 
ing their houses and planting their crops, a spirit of 
determination to drive the whites from the region 
spread among the tribes. 

There was just now, however, a lull in the direct 
warfare. Dusky faces occasionally were seen in the 
forest, but there was no open attack. 

Daniel Boone, however, was not to be deceived. 
He was confident that it was simply the hush which 
at times precedes the coming of the tempest. In 
his own mind he was convinced that the Indians 
simply were reserving their strength until they 
could rally a sufficient number to make an attack 
worth while. And Boone in the midst of all his 
labours — for he was toiling with the men of the 
settlement — was forming plans by which he hoped 
to meet the fierce attacks he expected the Shaw- 
nees to make. 

Frequent sallies upon the men when they were at 
work in the fields now began to be made. While 
they were plowing, the stealthy warriors did their 
utmost to waylay and shoot them. When they 
[ 149 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

were hunting they were chased and sometimes fired 
upon. Sometimes an Indian would creep up near 
the fort in the night and fire upon the first of the 
garrison to appear in the morning. The little set- 
tlement soon was in a state of continual and in- 
creasing alarm. 

Even many of the ordinary duties of life were 
performed only at great risk. But the deter- 
mination in the hearts of the hardy people to defend 
their new homes in the wonderful region strength- 
ened with every passing day. 
v Many of the settlers every night assembled with- 
in the walls of the fort. It was the expressed 
desire of Boone that all should do this, for in this way 
only could the safety of every one be assured. For 
the most part the people responded willingly to his 
appeal, and after a certain eventful night all were 
willing to heed his counsel. On that particular night 
occurred a struggle with the prowling Indians which 
made the name of one of the heroic women long to 
be remembered. 


[ 150 ] 


CHAPTER XVI 


CAPTIVES 

AS HAS been stated, the opening by Daniel 
Boone of the road through the wilderness 
JL JL to the new settlement, and the safety with 
which the journey thither had been accomplished, 
were strong inducements now to other families to 
make similar ventures. 

Within a few months the little settlement had 
increased until it contained at least one hun- 
dred and fifty people. Trees had been felled, log 
houses had been built, and with great energy the 
new people were preparing to make permanent 
homes in the fertile valleys. Most of the new- 
comers were more than willing to .follow the sug- 
gestion of Boone, who strongly advised all the 
settlers to seek safety in the shelter of the fort when 
night fell. 

The great scout was convinced that the Shaw- 
nees were continually watching the little commu- 
nity, and that their anger at the determination of the 
settlers to make permanent abodes in the beautiful 
region was steadily increasing. Every day Boone 
[ 151 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

was watchful. Occasionally the red men were seen, 
and not infrequently they crept close enough to 
the fort, or to the men when they were toiling in 
the forests or fields, to fire upon them; but as yet 
no concerted attack had been made. 

Among the families which had come was one 
named Merrill. Mr. Merrill was a vigorous, active 
young man, and his wife was almost as large 
as he and as strong. So convinced were the two 
young people of their ability to withstand any 
attack that might be made upon their home that 
they had been somewhat unmindful of the request 
of the leader. 

One morning in December Daniel Boone said to 
Peleg: “I wish you to go to Mr. Merrill’ s at once, 
and say to him that I have seen recently some 
signs of the Indians which greatly disturb me. It 
will not be necessary for you to say more, except 
that I strongly urge the Merrills to comply with 
my suggestion and come nightly to the fort.” 

Peleg, at the request of the scout, mounted a 
horse and rode in the direction of the little log 
cabin which the Merrills had erected on the ex- 
treme border beyond the settlement. He and 
Henry, accompanied by young Israel Boone, who 
now had become almost a man in size, had been fre- 
quent visitors at the friendly home of the Mer- 
rills. It was therefore with a feeling of personal 
[ 152 ] 


CAPTIVES 


interest as well as anxiety that the young hunter 
hastened to carry out the suggestion of the great 
scout. 

Before he arrived at the little house its appear- 
ance suggested to him that something was wrong. 
It was early in the morning and yet no smoke 
was rising from the chimney. The silence which 
rested over the place seemed ominous. So anxious 
was the young scout that he dismounted before he 
entered the clearing, tied his horse to one of the 
trees, and then cautiously crept forward to dis- 
cover what might be amiss with the household. 

When Peleg approached the border of the little 
clearing he halted and peered anxiously before 
him. No one was seen about the place. De- 
laying only a brief time, and holding Singing 
Susan in his hands ready for instant use if occasion 
required, Peleg called to the inmates of the house. 

“ Hello!” he called. As no response was given 
to his hail, he raised his voice and called again, 
“ Hello! Mr. Merrill!” Not even the dog, which 
was a great pet of Peleg’s, made any response. 
Several minutes elapsed and the silence was still 
unbroken. 

Troubled by his failure to arouse any one, Peleg 
darted swiftly across the clearing and, as he ap- 
proached the door, stopped in astonishment when 
he beheld near the threshold the bodies of two 
[ 153 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

dead Indians. As he looked about he saw bloody 
trails leading into the forest, which indicated that 
others also had been wounded. In the door a large 
breach had been made which was evidently the 
work of the Indian tomahawks. 

The young scout, his flesh creeping at his dis- 
covery, glanced about him in every direction, but 
no sign of friend or enemy could he see. The door 
itself was partly open, and as Peleg stepped within 
the little cabin the odour of burned feathers greeted 
him. 

There were many indications of a struggle which 
plainly had taken place within the room, but it was 
not until he had passed out to the rear of the little 
building and descried Mrs. Merrill approaching 
that his full courage returned. The resolute wo- 
man, her face pale, but otherwise not betraying 
any emotion, approached the young scout and 
said quietly: “I have just buried my husband.” 

The astonishment of Peleg was so great that he 
was unable to reply to the staggering statement, 
and then aware that the silent grief of his friend 
was almost more than she could bear, he assisted 
her within the house and soon was listening to her 
story. 

“I did not like to bury my husband so soon,” 
began the woman at last, “but I dared not wait to 
ask any one to come.” 

[ 154 ] 


CAPTIVES 


“Tell me about it,” said Peleg quietly, “unless 
you think that we had better start for the fort 
right away.” 

Mrs. Merrill shook her head as she said: “I do 
not think there is need of immediate haste. It 
must have been about midnight when our dog 
began to growl so savagely that my husband 
thought something must be wrong. He got up, 
and when he opened the door to find out what the 
trouble was he received the fire of six or seven 
Indians. He sank to the floor, but managed to 
call me to close the door and let down the bars. 

“I don’t know that I ever had such a thrilling 
or awful moment in my life! I could hear the 
savages on the porch, and I was afraid they would 
get to the door before I could shut and bar it. Just 
as I managed to close it and let the bar fall, the 
Indians began to pound upon it with their toma- 
hawks. If I had been one second later they would 
have got inside the house and I should now be 
where my husband is. They kept pounding on 
the door until they made a large hole in it. They 
did not know that I stood close by, waiting for 
them with an axe, and as fast as one after another — 
four of them • — tried to crawl through, I killed or 
badly wounded every one that made the attempt. 
They could not force their way into the cabin,” 
she added simply. 


[ 155 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“How many Indians did you say there were at 
the door?” inquired Peleg in astonishment. 

“Four, but only two of them were killed. At 
least there are only two left here, and the others 
may have got away.” 

“I saw two,” said Peleg. “How many were 
there altogether?” 

“Seven, I think. They kept away from the 
door after that, but pretty soon I heard them up 
on the roof. I knew then that they were trying to 
get into the house by coming down the chimney.” 

“I think I know how you kept them out,” said 
Peleg, smiling slightly. 

“Yes,” replied the woman. “I grabbed the 
only feather bed we had in our cabin and ripped it 
open, in desperate haste, feeling just as I did when 
I was trying to close the door. I knew if I was not 
quick enough the Shawnees would be in the room. 
It was fortunate that there were coals on the fire- 
place, and just as soon as I put the feathers on 
them a blaze sprang up and such smoke as I never 
saw began to pour up the chimney. In less than 
one minute two of the redskins fell into the fire- 
place, and with the same axe with which I had 
defended the door I quickly put an end to both 
varmints.” 

“That made six of the seven, then,” suggested 
Peleg. 

[ 156 ] 


CAPTIVES 


“Yes. But the seventh wasnT ready to leave 
yet. He ran around to the door and tried to 
crawl through while I was busy at the chimney. 
It was fortunate that I chanced to see him. He 
got a gash in the cheek, and you ought to have 
heard him yell when he ran away from the door. 
Talk to me about the Indians never making any 
fuss! This man was yelling so that you might 
have heard him at the fort. He called me the 
‘Long Knife Squaw,’ but I didn’t care so long 
as he cleared out for good and all! And I don’t 
believe any of them will come again very soon.” 

“What are you going to do now?” inquired 
Peleg. 

“I haven’t any plans.” 

“You must come with me to the fort.” 

“But I must not leave my clearing,” said the 
heroic woman. “Now that my husband is dead, 
I shall have everything to do.” 

“Come with me, and I will find some one to do 
what ought to be done here.” 

Yielding to the persuasion of the young scout, 
Mrs. Merrill accompanied him to the fort, where 
at once some of the women offered her the solace 
of their sympathy. 

Peleg at once assembled a little company of 
men, and led by Daniel Boone himself they re- 
turned to the scene of the brave woman’s struggles. 
[ 157 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


The dead Indians were buried and the two cows 
were driven within the stockade. 

“It will not be safe,” said Daniel Boone to 
Peleg, “for Mrs. Merrill to come back here alone. 
If she does insist upon coming, either you or 
Israel must be with her. She should be persuaded, 
however, not to expose herself to such dangers as 
she will meet here.” 

“She seems to be able to protect herself,” said 
Peleg dryly. 

“Indeed she does. I question if there is another 
woman in our settlement who would have been 
able to do what she did. Single-handed, to keep 
off seven Shawnees! I believe that the story of 
her bravery will be told to your grandchildren, 
Peleg.” 

Mrs. Merrill, however, was found to be more 
reasonable than the great scout’s fear had war- 
ranted. She was quite willing to make her home 
for the present where the peril and the loneliness 
were not so great as in her cabin. 

The attacks of the Indians continued, although 
no party as large as that which had attacked the 
home of the Merrills was seen. The plowmen in 
the fields, the men cutting the timber, and those 
who separated from their fellows while hunting 
game were continually in danger. 

The determination of the whites was as great as 

[ 158 ] 


CAPTIVES 


that of the Indians, and although every one was 
anxious, no one thought of withdrawing from the 
settlement. 

To Daniel Boone himself there came a little 
later an experience almost as thrilling as that which 
had befallen Mrs. Merrill. 

Among the new families was one named Calla- 
way. In this family there was a girl of nearly the 
same age as Daniel’s Boone’s daughter Jemima. 
One morning, early in the summer, the girls, taking 
the one canoe which was kept near the fort, pad- 
died out upon the river. 

“Do not go more than one hundred feet above or 
below the fort,” warned Daniel Boone, who stood 
on the bank watching the girls. Both promised, 
and soon in their light-hearted way were paddling 
the canoe back and forth from shore to shore. 

Satisfied that the girls were well within the pro- 
tection they needed, Daniel Boone returned to his 
labours and no one was left upon the bank to watch 
them. 

As the sport continued, and before either of the 
girls was aware of the fact, the light canoe had 
drifted beyond the points which had been desig- 
nated by the scout as the limits of safety. Discover- 
ing some flowers along the shore, they pushed the 
little craft in among the tall rushes while they plucked 
the blossoms they were seeking. The canoe was 
[ 159 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


well within the rushes and concealed, as the girls 
thought, from the sight of any one on the bank. 

Suddenly the younger girl, emitting a piercing 
shriek, turned to Jemima Boone, and exclaimed: 
“Look there ! Oh, look there ! ” 

As Jemima sharply turned about she saw, creep- 
ing through the rushes and concealed from the 
sight of any one on the shore, a huge Shawnee 
warrior, who already had seized the painter of the 
little craft. 

Scream followed scream when the Indian began 
to pull the canoe toward him. In a moment he 
was joined by several of his dusky comrades. The 
canoe was drawn to the shore and the girls, prison- 
ers of the savages, were dragged up the bank. 


[ 160 ] 


CHAPTER XVII 


THE PURSUIT 


HE screams of the terrified girls were 



plainly heard at the fort. A little com- 


JL pany of frightened women and frantic 
men quickly assembled upon the bank, but in 
spite of the piteous appeals it was too late to help 
the unfortunate prisoners. Four additional Indians 
appeared and, assisting their comrades, seized the 
girls and with them rushed into the wilderness. 

The men from the fort who were standing on the 
bank of the stream were unable to cross, the only 
canoe being now on the opposite shore. 

Calling to one another, the men endeavoured to 
find some one who would venture to swim to the 
other shore. No one volunteered, however, as 
all were afraid that the Indians might return if 
such an attempt should be made. Both Daniel 
Boone and the father of Miss Callaway were ab- 
sent from the settlement at the time, and it was 
nearly night when they returned. 

Stopping only a moment to comfort his heart- 
broken wife, Daniel Boone, as soon as he was in- 


[ 161 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

formed, acted promptly and decisively, as was his 
habit. He was well aware that no time should be 
lost, and fortunately he discovered Peleg at that 
moment returning to the fort. 

“The girls have been taken by the Indians,” 
said Boone, suppressing his emotion. 

“What girls? What do you mean?” inquired 
Peleg, aghast. 

“Jemima and her friend, the Callaway girl.” 

“When?” 

“This noon. I have no time to explain. We 
must get a party to start right away. Find every 
man you can and I, too, will look about, and we will 
meet here at the fort just as soon as we can get our 
party together.” 

Darting into the house, Peleg secured Singing 
Susan, and then, finding Israel Boone, who was 
almost as aroused as his father, the two instantly 
began their search for men who would join the 
rescue party. 

Soon afterward a band of eight men stood with 
the scout on the bank of the Kentucky River near 
the fort. The quiet of the summer evening was 
unbroken save by the occasional cry of some 
night-bird. It had been long since the screams of 
the disappearing girls had been heard, but the 
direction from which they had come indicated the 
way in which to start the pursuit. 

[ 162 ] 


THE PURSUIT 


“How many are here?” inquired Boone, as he 
glanced about the group. 

“Eight,” replied Peleg, “including you and 
Israel.” 

“We need more, but I shall not wait. We will 
start at once.” 

The canoe meanwhile had been secured by one 
of the boys of the settlement who swam across the 
river at dusk and returned in the little craft, pad- 
dling with his hand, for the blades had been broken 
by the Indians to delay pursuit. 

The men now were ferried across the river, and 
as soon as every one was standing on the opposite 
bank Daniel Boone again inquired: “Is every one 
prepared?” 

Every member of the party declared that he was 
ready to follow wherever the great scout might lead. 

Instantly Daniel Boone led the way into the for- 
est. The anxious scout was so quiet and self- 
controlled that an uninformed spectator would 
never have suspected that he was labouring under 
I special stress. Even Peleg was astonished at the 
composed bearing of the man. 

Turning to Israel, the young scout remarked: 
“Your father is saving every ounce of his strength 
for the work ahead of us. He is not wasting any 
time crying.” 

“He never does,” responded Israel proudly. 

[ 163 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“Do you know, Peleg,” young Boone said, “there 
are times when Parson John Lythe preaches to us 
that he speaks of the Great Father of us all, and 
somehow I always think of Him as if He looked 
somewhat as my father does.” 

Deeply impressed as Peleg was by the reverence 
in which the son of Daniel Boone held his father, 
there was no opportunity at the time for further 
conversation. 

In Indian file the pursuers advanced, and all soon 
were running, following the custom of the Indians. 
So skilled was the leader in this work that it was 
well known that he was able for many hours to 
maintain the pace at which he was now moving. 

“One time,” said Israel to Peleg, “my father 
ran like this for eight hours, then rested two hours, 
and then ran eight more, and after he had taken 
another rest he made the third stretch of the same 
number of hours.” 

The leader had not spoken except when in the 
dim light of the moon he was compelled to stop to 
search for the trail. Once when he halted he said 
to his companions : “ The Shawnees are not moving 
in one body. They have broken up into ten par- 
ties and are moving in parallel lines.” 

“Did they expect to throw us off the trail in that 
way?” asked Israel scornfully. 

“Doubtless they hoped to. Peleg,” inquired 
[ 164 ] 


THE PURSUIT 


Boone, turning to the young scout, “how many do 
you make out were in this band that stole Je- 
mima?” 

“About thirty, I should say,” replied Peleg. 

“It is more nearly thirty-five,” declared Boone, 
as he turned to direct his followers to resume the 
pursuit. 

Somehow the night did not prove to be a serious 
obstacle to the great leader. Almost as if by in- 
stinct Boone found his way, and the parallel trails 
made by the Indians, instead of throwing the pur- 
suers into confusion, really aided them. If the 
trail was lost in one place it then became com- 
paratively easy for the men to scatter and in a 
brief time discover it nearby. 

“Plow far have we come?” Israel inquired of his 
father when a halt was made in the morning. 

“Thirty miles,” replied Daniel Boone. 

“Do you find anything new?” 

“Yes,” replied the scout, nodding his head. 
“The Indians are less careful than they were. The 
trail is becoming plainer. I hope we shall overtake 
them before noon.” 

It was not long before the pursuit was resumed, 
and the pace of the entire party was increased when 
it was discovered that the Indians had entered a 
buffalo road and were following that clearly defined 
path. 


[ 165 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


The expression upon the face of Boone, who, 
with Peleg and Israel, was in advance of the little 
band, made every one aware that he expected soon 
to overtake the savages. The time of anxiety as 
well as peril was surely approaching. 

“Peleg,” whispered Israel, “what do you think 
will be done to the girls if the Indians see us before 
we get within rifle shot?” 

Peleg shook his head and did not reply, although 
both he and his friend were aware that the Indians 
would doubtless tomahawk their captives and then 
flee if they should discover their pursuers close 
upon them. 

Nearly ten more miles were covered before the 
escaping band was overtaken. Each party dis- 
covered the other almost at the same moment. 
The Indians were in the act of kindling a fire and 
preparing camp for the night. Almost as if it was 
one sound, the rifles of Daniel Boone, Peleg, and 
Israel rang out together. 

Two of the Indians fell to the ground. All the 
other braves, as if driven by one impulse, instantly 
turned and fled from the spot, leaving the terrified 
girls behind them. So sudden had been the flight 
of the savages that when they darted into the 
adjacent forest they had been unable to don their 
moccasins. Not a man in the pursuing party had 
been injured. 


[ 166 ] 


THE PURSUIT 


The cry of Jemima Boone when in the dim light * 
she beheld her father approaching at the head of 
the rescuing party was one that those who heard 
her never were able to forget. She sprang from the 
ground where she had been seated and threw her- 
self into her father’s arms. For a time not a word 
was spoken by any one, while the well-nigh ex- 
hausted girl clung to Daniel Boone sobbing as if 
her heart would break. 

The pursuit which had been led by the great scout 
had been so swift and unrelenting that scarcely 
any time for rest had been given the band since 
its departure from the fort the preceding evening; 
and only a short time for recuperation could be 
allowed even now. This was some hardship for the 
men, but for the girls, who, in addition to the terror 
and despair which had possessed them, had been 
compelled to travel through the forests at a speed 
which exhausted their strength, it was doubly hard. 

Jemima explained to her father that they had 
arrived at the place where they had been discovered 
only a few moments before the coming of the 
hunter and his friends. The girl shuddered as she 
said: “If the Shawnees had had two minutes more 
they would have killed both of us before they ran; 
and I do not understand why they ran, anyway.” 

“How many warriors were in the band?” in- 
quired her father. 


[ 167 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


“Thirty-six.” 

“We cannot stay here long. The varmints will 
be coming back, and they outnumber us so greatly 
that we may have serious trouble.” 

It was accordingly decided that the party should 
begin their return at once. For a time Daniel 
Boone carried his daughter in his arms, while her 
companion, almost exhausted, was also carried by 
one of the men. 

When several miles had been covered word for 
rest was given, and then, after a hasty meal was 
made from the loin of a deer which Peleg shot, the 
flight toward the fort was resumed. 

It was soon discovered, however, that the Indians 
were not pursuing, and when Boone became con- 
vinced that this was so, his anxiety was relieved, 
and he decided not to maintain the swift pace at 
which they had been moving. 

Two days later the party arrived at the fort on the 
bank of the Kentucky, and the relief of the dis- 
tracted mothers as well as the general rejoicing 
over the safe return of the rescuers was great. 
After a rest of a day, the scout and all the party 
resumed their accustomed summer tasks. 

It was a few days afterward, while Peleg and 
Israel were engaged in hoeing a field of corn that 
belonged to Peleg, that the scout approached his 
friend. 


[ 168 ] 


THE PURSUIT 


“Peleg, ” he said, as he halted in front of the boy, 
“we are to have a meeting in the fort to-morrow at 
noon and I hope you surely will be present. ” 

“What is the meeting for?” 

“We are to pass some laws. We now have 
more than one hundred and fifty souls in this 
little settlement, and up to the present time every 
one has been a law unto himself. We now must 
pass some laws which shall govern us as a commu- 
nity.” 

“Is Sam Oliver here again?” inquired Peleg with 
a laugh. > 

“Not as yet,” answered Boone quizzically, 
smiling as he appreciated the discovery his young 
friend had made as to one of the causes for his 
desire to pass some laws by which all should be 
regulated. 

“Colonel Henderson will preside,” said Boone. 
“He, as you know, was the original purchaser of 
this tract of land from the Cherokees, and he 
kindly consented to permit us to make a settle- 
ment here.” 

“I shall try to be there,” promised Peleg, as the 
scout passed on to make further arrangements for 
the meeting, and the two boys resumed their task. 

It was a serious assemblage of men that met the 
following noon. After accepting the chair, Colonel 
Henderson said: “I shall ask the Reverend John 
[ 169 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


Lythc, our pioneer preacher, to address the Throne 
of Grace. ” 

At the conclusion of the old minister’s prayer, 
Colonel Henderson solemnly said: “This legis- 
lature is now opened in the name of his Majesty 
the King of Great Britain. ” In his address he re- 
minded his hearers of the importance of laying a 
broad and strong foundation for the future. He 
declared that the secret of future success depended 
largely upon the carefulness of their present prep- 
aration. He also explained how good and wholesome 
laws, such as would command the respect and support 
of the people, would benefit not merely the settle- 
ment as a whole, but also every individual member. 

Various laws then were proposed, discussed, and 
adopted by vote of the assembly. 

In the midst of the meeting, which both Peleg 
and Israel were enjoying keenly, Daniel Boone 
arose and asked for recognition from the chairman. 

“ My father is going to make a speech !” whispered 
Israel in amazement, as he leaned toward Peleg. 
Never had either heard the scout speak under such 
circumstances. He was so self-contained in his 
manner and spoke so seldom that no one had 
thought of him as a man to make a public address. 
It was therefore with intense interest that every 
one present turned to listen to what Daniel Boone 
might say. 


[ 170 ] 


CHAPTER XVIII 


A BAND OF SCOUTS 

H E WOULD rather face three live painters, ” 
whispered Israel gleefully. “I never saw 
my father scared before.” 

In a moment, however, the boys were listening 
intently to what the great scout was saying. 

“I am no speechmaker,” began Daniel Boone, 
his voice trembling slightly as he spoke. “I know 
a little of the language of the deer and of the songs 
of the birds. The cry of the nighthawk has its 
meaning for me, to which it almost would be possi- 
ble for me to reply. Even the scream of the painter 
is in a language which I understand, but wdien I 
look into the faces of my friends, who are much 
better fitted than I am to say what is best for this 
little community, I am at a loss how to proceed.” 
The hunter paused a moment and the sympathetic 
interest of his hearers plainly encouraged him to 
go on. “It is true,” he continued quietly, “I have 
a name for being somewhat successful as a scout 
and a hunter. I think you will all bear me witness, 
however, that never yet willingly have I inflicted 
[ 171 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

pain upon even the weakest of God’s creatures. 
Whenever I draw a bead on a deer I do so with the 
thought in my mind that here is the provision of 
the Almighty for food for His children. With all 
my might, mind, and strength I am opposed to 
any cruelty to dumb creatures, and also to any 
wanton waste of the game in our forests. I am 
sure I am giving voice to your convictions also 
when I say that we want no man within our settle- 
ment who does not have some such feeling as I have 
just described. Sometimes our boys are thought- 
less and shoot perhaps more for the sake of kill- 
ing than to secure provisions for our homes. We 
must be patient with them and strive to show them 
how mistaken they are. What I desire greatly 
just now is that a law shall be adopted to protect 
the game in our forests.” The hunter took his 
seat and a murmur of applause at once came from 
the little assembly. 

“Do you make that as a motion?” inquired 
Colonel Henderson. 

“I do,” responded the scout, rising and gravely 
bowing as he spoke. 

The motion was seconded, and without one 
opposing vote the assembly agreed to the sugges- 
tion of Daniel Boone. 

As soon as this motion was adopted the great 
scout once more arose and in his quiet and digni- 
[ 172 ] 


A BAND OF SCOUTS 

fied manner again began to speak: “There is an- 
other matter in which I am deeply interested. I 
have never been able to understand how any man 
made in the image of his Creator could take his 
Creator’s name in vain. In my experience I have 
noticed that profanity is limited to men who are 
either weak or vicious. I think, my friends, that 
you will agree with me that we want neither class 
in our little settlement on the banks of the Ken- 
tucky. I therefore move that we adopt a law pro- 
hibiting profanity.” 

It was manifest that not every one in the as- 
sembly agreed with these sentiments of the hunter, 
and there was a moment of hesitation. Peleg, how- 
ever, always ready to further the efforts of his friend, 
whom he admired more than he did any living 
man, promptly arose and seconded the motion, 
which then was passed without any opposition, 
though not with the enthusiasm which had greeted 
the preceding motion. 

Once more the tall scout arose and said: “I have 
still one other desire in my heart. As you all know, 
our little settlement has been unusually free from 
the brawls which occur in so many of the hamlets 
on the border. I am confident it is the desire of 
every one here that the same things shall continue 
to be true. If we must fight, then let us fight hard; 
but all petty quarrellings and brawls, let them not 
[ 173 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

henceforth even be mentioned among us. With 
this peaceful desire in our minds, I greatly desire 
that a law shall be adopted to express the wish of 
this settlement that the Sabbath shall not be like 
other days. We surely toil so hard throughout 
six days of the week that if there were no other 
purpose in our minds we ought to rest on the 
Lord’s Day. In order that this may be clearly 
understood, I move that a law be adopted which 
shall voice the sentiment of this community against 
the profanation of the Sabbath Day.” 

There was no openly expressed opposition to 
the desire of the scout, and Peleg having promptly 
seconded this motion, his third suggestion also was 
adopted. 

Soon afterward, Colonel Henderson called upon 
the pioneer preacher to close the meeting with 
prayer, and the assembly dispersed. 

Peleg, Israel Boone, and Henry departed to- 
gether from the fort. The last named was now 
able to express himself in English and, though he 
was still reserved in his bearings toward the people 
in general, his friendship for Peleg and Israel had 
strengthened with every passing day. 

“I never know such man like your father,” said 
Henry to Israel. 

“He is the best man that ever lived!” broke in 
Peleg enthusiastically. “He has been just like a 
[174] 


A BAND OF SCOUTS 

father to me, and if he was my real father I should 
be the proudest man in all Kentucky.” 

“That would mean a great many people,” sug- 
gested Israel with a smile. “I understand there 
are new settlers arriving every day. I have heard 
that Logan’s Fort and Harrodsburgh are filling in 
very fast.” 

“So I have heard,” responded Peleg. 

“If the Indians would only leave us free!” 

“But they will not,” broke in Henry. “They 
say white people not make any more settlements, 
and it not long before they drive out those that 
are here.” 

“Let them try!” said Israel dryly. 

“They have been trying,” remarked Peleg. 
“There is not a day that we have not seen some 
signs of the Shawnees or Delawares prowling around 
the forts.” 

“They have not made any open attack for some 
time now,” suggested Israel Boone. 

Henry shook his head as he said: “That means 
they only wait. Pretty soon you see. They feel 
for white men like wolf feel for bear.” 

“And that is about the same love that a dog has 
for a cat,” suggested Peleg with a laugh. 

“That is it,” acknowledged Henry soberly. “I 
never know why bear and wolf no like each other. 
They kill many other things, but when wolf find 
[ 1 75 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

trail of bear he call to all his friends and they begin 
to chase Mr. Bear. One day I saw a pack of 
wolves chasing big bear.” 

“Was the bear running from them?” inquired 
Israel. 

“Yes, he run much fast. By and by he come to 
place where he can go no more, then he stand up 
with his back to tree, and the way he cuff those 
wolves first one side, then on other, make me 
laugh.” 

“Yes,” said Peleg, “I have seen the same thing 
myself. It is like the feeling that Sam Oliver says 
the otter has for the beaver.” 

“Or the mink for the ermine,” suggested Israel. 

“Both mink and ermine bad as they can be,” 
said Henry, shaking his head. “They kill all 
things not so strong as they.” 

“Yes,” suggested Peleg, “I think the mink and 
ermine are about the worst animals alive. The 
mink is three or four times as big as the ermine 
is and has a good deal more strength ” 

“But the ermine so quick,” interrupted Henry. 
“He so quick,” he repeated, “and he most blood- 
thirsty little animal in the forest. When he begin 
to fight he always fight on until either he is killed 
or mink is killed.” 

“ Sam Oliver was telling me the last time he was 
in the settlement,” said Peleg, “that last winter 
[ 176 ] 


A BAND OF SCOUTS 

he was trailing a fox that was chasing a rabbit, and 
when Sam came to his trap-line he heard, away off 
to one side, a mink scream. He says you can hear 
a mink scream almost a quarter of a mile away. 
He was trapping minks and he thought he had one 
caught, so he turned and started for his trap. 
When he got there he saw, so he said, the biggest 
fight he ever saw in the woods. A mink was 
caught in his trap and an ermine was fighting him. 

“Pretty quick he saw that instead of there being 
only one there were two of the ermine. They kept 
walking around the mink in a circle and kept going 
faster and faster until by and by one of them, quick 
as lightning, right in front of the mink, jumped for 
him, and almost at the same time the other ermine 
jumped in, too, and tried to get a grip on the mink’s 
neck. They must have tried that same thing be- 
fore, because this time he heard the mink scream, 
too, though he was doing something besides. For 
about half a minute Sam said he couldn’t hear or 
see much of anything except the fracas. Then just 
about as swiftly as the two ermine had jumped 
into the fight, they jumped out and began to circle 
around the mink again. The next time they tried 
to get the neck hold only one of them slipped 
back. The other got his teeth fastened right where 
he wanted them, and you know they are like needles. 
Then the other ermine came back and he, too, got 
[ 177 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

a throat hold. In just a few minutes the whole 
affair was ended and the ermine came out ahead. 
Sam said he could have walked up to them and 
picked them up, they were so excited, squeaking 
like mice, and trying to tear the dead mink all to 
pieces.” 

“Sam got the two ermine then, didn’t he?” in- 
quired Israel. 

“Yes. I told him, though, I thought they had 
earned their right to live, but Sam never feels that 
way about such things.” 

The reference to Sam Oliver had brought a 
scowl to the face of Henry and caused him to 
become silent as long as the hunter was a topic of 
conversation. 

In the succeeding days reports of the presence 
of Indians steadily increased. Several men toiling 
in the fields were fired upon by Shawnees who had 
crept up to the border of the forest. 

Steadily the Indians showed their determination 
to do their utmost to prevent the settlers from 
making homes in their hunting grounds. The 
hostilities of the Shawnees became more marked 
with every passing month. Indeed, so many were 
the manifestations of their plan to attack the 
settlements that finally Colonel Clark, who at 
this time had been given the command of all mili- 
tary forces in Kentucky, became so convinced that 
[178] 


A BAND OF SCOUTS 

there was a plan in the minds of the Indians to 
assemble a great body of their warriors to destroy 
the border forts and their inhabitants that he 
begged the pioneer scout to act as a spy and to 
assume charge of other spies that were to be sent 
among the tribes to learn their numbers as well as 
their designs. 

Daniel Boone, fully aware of the danger, and in 
spite of his desire to remain at home, responded to 
this new call because he looked upon himself as in 
a measure answerable for the safety of the people 
whom he had induced to come into Kentucky. At 
this time the region was known as the “dark and 
bloody ground,” so many had been the attacks 
and conflicts between the incoming whites and 
their Indian foes. 

Daniel Boone ordered his spies to start out in 
different directions, and after they had scoured the 
country for miles around, they were to meet at a 
time and place agreed upon and report what they 
had discovered and form their plans for the future. 

Convinced at last that there was no immediate 
danger of a concerted attack by the Indians, the 
scout returned to Boonesborough and resumed his 
labours. 

“Peleg,” said Boone one day not long after his 
return, “we must have some salt. I shall take a 
party to Blue Licks. Will you come? ” 

[ 179 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“Yes, sir,” replied Peleg promptly. 

“I shall leave Israel at home to protect the 
family, but I shall want you and Henry to go with 
me. We ought to have a party of twenty-five or 
thirty men not only to make the salt, but to keep 
back the Shawnees, who are likely to make trouble 
for us if we are not strong enough to defend our- 
selves. ” 

The following day Daniel Boone, together with 
Peleg and twenty- six other men, departed for the 
salt springs, or Blue Licks, as they were called by the 
settlers. Neither of the scouts, however, was aware 
that he was there to meet with the most thrilling 
adventure of his life. 


[ 180 ] 


CHAPTER XIX 


THE CAPTURE 

S EVERAL days of hard work followed the 
arrival of the party at the salt springs. 
Fireplaces had to be made, boilers arranged, 
and the water evaporated, leaving its deposit of 
salt, so necessary in the life of the people of Boones- 
borough. 

The process, however, was exceedingly slow, 
although the men toiled day and night because of 
their desire to return to their homes, and their fear 
of the prowling Indians. On the third day, when 
the supplies of food were low, Daniel Boone sug- 
gested that he should for a time leave his com- 
panions at their task while he secured some game 
which might be prepared for their dinner that night. 

Taking his rifle and shaking his head when Peleg 
offered to accompany him, the hunter departed. 
No one expected him to be gone more than an 
hour. When, however, three hours had elapsed his 
friends became increasingly uneasy. They had 
relied on their numbers as being a sufficient pro- 
tection against the prowling Indians. The savages 
' [ 181 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

were known to be near, and occasionally they had 
been seen skulking from tree to tree. Because of 
this condition, the decision of Daniel Boone to go 
alone had been opposed by his companions, and as 
his absence continued there was increasing anxiety 
for his safety. 

Meanwhile, if Peleg and his companions had 
known what had befallen the scout, they would 
have had even stronger grounds for their fears. 

For some reason Boone was unable to discover 
any game in the immediate proximity of the camp, 
so he proceeded several miles through the forest in 
his search. When he halted at last and looked 
about him he concluded that he must be at least 
four miles from the Blue Lick Springs. He was 
aware of the peril which might beset a lonely 
hunter at such times, and as the afternoon sun 
was steadily declining, decided to retrace his way 
toward camp. 

As he turned abruptly he was startled to behold 
five young Indians swiftly approaching. 

Without hesitating a moment Boone whirled 
about and ran. Exerting himself to the utmost, 
he sped through the forest, closely followed by his 
pursuers, who, for some reason which he did not 
understand, had not fired upon him. 

Capable as Boone was of a long-continued race, 
speed could not be his main reliance. He was no 
[ 182 ] 


THE CAPTURE 


longer a young man, and his pursuers were in the 
prime of their young manhood. 

Glancing behind him, Boone was aware that his 
enemies were gaining upon him. Wheeling sud- 
denly he darted into the brush, then leaped into a 
swiftly running stream and ran with the current 
for one hundred feet or more before he jumped to 
the bank on the opposite side and once more re- 
sumed his flight. 

Apparently, however, it was impossible for him 
to shake off his pursuers. Doggedly they held to 
the chase, and the conviction was strengthening in 
Boone ’s mind that not only were the young warriors 
gaining steadily upon him, but also that they were 
maintaining a pace which would soon be too great 
for him to keep up. Indeed it was only a few 
minutes later when by an unusual burst of speed 
his enemies overtook and surrounded him. 

Boone smiled in spite of his peril when he saw 
that their first demand was for his rifle. It was 
plain that they knew who he was and were proud 
of their success in capturing the great scout. One 
of the young Indians was able to speak a few words 
of English, and advancing to Boone he extended 
his hand as a token of friendship and shook hands 
after the manner of the white people. 

“Big scout broder,” said the young warrior, 
“No shoot. No kill. ” 


[ 183 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Boone smilingly nodded his head in token of com- 
prehension and without demur followed his captors 
as they led him rapidly through the forest. If he 
was chagrined or cast down his feeling was not 
betrayed by his countenance. 

The Indians seldom spoke as they proceeded, and 
Boone’s surprise was great when after an advance 
of an hour he was taken into the midst of a group 
of one hundred and fifty Shawnee warriors. 

Here, too, the hunter was recognized, and there 
were many expressions of delight over the capture 
of the man whom all the Indians of the region 
knew and feared. Boone soon was to learn that 
they also entertained for him a feeling close to affec- 
tion. 

Apparently unmoved by the peril in which he 
now found himself, Boone looked quietly into the 
faces of the braves and awaited their action. 

In a brief time, in the midst of the band, he was 
conducted back toward Blue Lick Springs. Sur- 
prised at first by the direction in which they were 
moving, his fears for his friends increased with 
every passing mile. They were outnumbered by the 
Indians in the approaching party, and were without 
his leadership. How would they be able to defend 
themselves from an attack? 

This question was unanswered when the band 
arrived within a half mile of the place they were 
[184] 


THE CAPTURE 


seeking. Then one of the younger chiefs approached 
Boone and said in his broken English: “Big hunter. 
No hurt. Broders of big hunter no hurt. No 
shoot. ” 

“Do you mean,” inquired Boone, “that my 
friends will be taken prisoners and not shot?” 

The Indian laughed, for his pleasure at the 
apparent success of their undertaking was manifest, 
and he said: “No shoot. No kill white broder. ” 

“Do you mean, ” asked Boone once more, “that 
if they do not shoot, you will not?” 

“No shoot. No hurt,” answered the Indian. 

“Which means that you will take us all to your 
village?” 

The Indian nodded in assent. 

“And if they do not shoot and you make cap- 
tives of them, do you promise that you will not 
harm them when you take them to your village?” 

“No shoot. No hurt,” repeated the Indian, 
nodding his head several times to add emphasis to 
his words. “Big scout go with Owaneeyo — tell 
broders. ” 

“ You want me to tell them that you are here, and 
that if they do not shoot then you will not shoot, 
either, and that you give your word that they will 
not be harmed if they go with you to your village?” 

The Indian smiled broadly as he said: “Big 
scout go with Injun — tell broder. Shawnee no 
[1S5] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

shoot. No hurt white broder. White broder 
shoot, Shawnee shoot. No take white broder to 
village, take white broder scalp. ” 

For a few moments Boone silently considered. 
He well knew that it would be impossible for his 
friends to escape the united attack of the Shawnees. 
Every warrior was armed with a gun, and, as the 
band outnumbered the whites nearly five to one, 
it would be worse than useless for them to attempt 
to defend themselves. On the other hand, if they 
submitted quietly it might be possible partly to 
disarm the captors of their watchfulness, and as 
there were so many of the whites some oppor- 
tunity might arise that would provide an avenue for 
escape. In the latter event the chances that more 
of the men would escape alive were much better 
than they would be if they attempted to defend 
themselves at the present time. 

Accordingly, Boone said to the young chief: “I 
will go with you to tell my brothers what the chiefs 
say if you will come with me unarmed.” 

For a moment there was an expression of anger 
or suspicion in the eyes of the stalwart young 
Indian, but it quickly passed, and he said: “Big 
scout no lie. Owaneeyo go without gun. Tell bro- 
ders what Owaneeyo say to scout. ” 

Turning to his companions the young chief gave 
his command for them to encircle the springs where 
[ 186 ] 


THE CAPTURE 


the white men were at work. As soon as his orders 
had been obeyed he stepped up to Boone and bowed 
low to indicate his readiness to accompany the 
scout. 

Without a word both advanced, with Boone 
moving directly before his companion. They 
soon came to the spot where the whites were en- 
gaged in their task, all unaware of the peril that 
was threatening them. 

Many curious glances were given the companion 
of the scout when Boone and the chief first ap- 
peared. In compliance with Boone’s suggestion, 
the men gave up their labours and assembled to 
hear what the chief had to say. 

The speech of Owaneeyo was not long, but every 
word held a meaning which strongly impressed the 
listening settlers. 

When the chief ceased speaking Boone himself 
stepped forward and said: “My friends, there is 
nothing else to do. I am sure you would not 
credit me with being a coward. I am speaking 
that which I know. There are at least one hundred 
and fifty of the Shawnees here and they are in a 
circle all about us right now. We have no de- 
fences behind which to fight, and they are able to 
pick us off without exposing themselves. If we 
run we should find in whatever direction we went 
that we were going straight into their arms. They 
[ 187 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

promise us that if we do not fire upon them they 
will not shoot any of us. The chief also has agreed 
to see that we have good treatment not only here 
and on our way to their village, but also after we 
arrive there.” 

There were some murmurs of disapproval, but 
the word and the example of the scout were both 
so influential that assent was soon given, and the 
chief was told that the white men would make no 
protest. 

At his bidding their rifles were all deposited in 
one place. A moment later he emitted a loud call, 
and almost as if they had sprung from the ground 
itself the Shawnees came running to the place where 
the settlers were awaiting them. 

The entire party soon left the springs, the white 
prisoners being scattered among the warriors in 
such a manner that no two were able to converse. 
In spite of the fierce glances of some of the braves, 
there was slight fear on Boone’s part that the 
word of Owaneeyo would be broken. Cruel the 
Indian might be in his own way, and treacherous 
according to the standards of the whites, but his 
promise, once having been given, was binding. 

The band moved rapidly, stopping only occasion- 
ally by night. Not one of the prisoners was aware 
what Indian village was to be their destination, 
although the scout, from his familiarity with the 
[ 188 ] 


THE CAPTURE 


region through which they were conducted, was 
convinced that they were being taken to the place 
called Chillicothe. 

His surmise proved to be correct, and on the 
fifth day the returning party with their prisoners 
arrived at the capital of the Shawnees. Their 
coming was greeted with cries and shouts and many 
expressions of delight by the Indians of Chillicothe. 
To these, however, the warriors gave slight heed, 
and the prisoners endeavoured to' follow their ex- 
ample, though it was difficult for some of them 
completely to assume an air of indifference. What 
the fate of the captives was to be was not to be 
known until the following day. 


[1891 


CHAPTER XX 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 

T HERE had been slight opportunity for 
Peleg to have any conversation with his 
friend throughout the march. 

The Indians, rejoiced over their success in mak- 
ing a prisoner of the great scout, nevertheless 
appeared to be fearful lest the man whom they 
valued so highly should escape. Throughout the 
journey the prisoners were treated with consider- 
ation, although when night came and the halts 
were made for rest the white men were com- 
pelled to sleep within a circle formed by their 
captors. In this way they were deprived of every 
possibility of escape. When, however, they had 
arrived at the old village of Chillicothe, there 
were a few minutes when Daniel Boone and Peleg 
and several of their comrades were left together in 
the wigwam into which they had been thrust. 

“ Peleg,” said Daniel Boone in a low voice, “what 
a mistake our enemies have made. ” 

“What do you mean?” inquired Peleg quickly. 
“If they had taken us to Boonesborough or to 
[ 190 ] 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 

Logan’s Fort and there had shown us to the settlers 
they could have demanded almost any price they 
might choose for our ransom. ” 

“Will they not do it yet?” inquired Peleg. 

“I hardly think so,” replied the scout, shaking 
his head. “The Indians are like children in many 
ways. When they have been successful, either on the 
warpath or in the chase, they immediately return 
to their friends to celebrate their good fortune with 
them. They are easily elated, and are almost child- 
ish in seeking the praise of those whose opinions 
they value. That is the reason why they have 
come back to the village with their twenty-eight 
prisoners. ” 

“What will happen to us?” inquired Peleg 
anxiously. 

“That no man can say. All that I am sure of is 
that we must bear whatever comes in the spirit 
of those who know that it is the best thing that 
could happen for every one of us.” 

“If they burn us at the stake?” inquired Peleg 
bitterly. 

“ Yes, even if they burn us at the stake. It will be 
hard to bear if they do that, but I am not without 
hope that they will adopt some other course.” 

“They may make us run the gauntlet.” 

“Yes, they may,” admitted Boone, “but there 
is one thing, Peleg, we do not have to do.” 

[ 191 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

4 4 What is that, sir? ” 

“We do not have to bear anything before it 
conies. All that any man can do is to prepare for 
what may befall him, and then, whatever comes, 
bear it like a man. But he who worries over his 
troubles before they arrive is in no condition to 
bear them after they come.” 

“I know that is your way of thinking,” said 
Peleg, “but I have not learned it yet.” 

“That’s the correct word, Peleg.” 

“What word?” inquired the younger scout 
quickly. 

4 ‘The word ‘learned.’ No one has it at the be- 
ginning of his life. Even Preacher Lythe told us 
one time that he, like Paul, ‘ learned’ in whatsoever 
state he was, therewith to be content.” 

“So have you!” said Peleg cordially. 

Boone smiled and shook his head as he replied: 
“I have learned not to reveal all my feelings. Be- 
yond that I cannot say. But I am so fully con- 
vinced that whatever befalls me in this life is part 
of a great plan, that it would be foolish for me to 
complain or whine. Whatever happens, no one 
shall ever be able to say that he heard a whimper 
from Daniel Boone. Whate’er may come to us, 
lad, do not let any of these Shawnees see that you 
are in the least cast down.” 

“I shall do my best.” 

[ 192 ] 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 

“ I am hopeful,” said Boone, “that we shall not 
be treated severely. Chief Owaneeyo gave us his 
promise when we surrendered that we should be 
treated with kindness both on our journey and 
after we arrived at the Indian village. I believe 
he spoke truly.” 

“ What I am afraid of,” said Peleg, “is that some 
of these braves will not listen to him. I think 
Owaneeyo will live up to his promise as far as he is 
able.” 

“There, Peleg, you are borrowing trouble again. 
What shall I do with you?” said Boone gently. 
“For myself, I shall look for the better side, and if 
the hard times come I shall bear them as I may be 
able, but I am expecting that things will not be as 
bad as you fear, and I shall keep myself ready if 
Providence reveals any opening for our release. 
I believe firmly that such an opening will come and 
that we shall yet go back to our friends.” 

“I hope so,” said Peleg fervently. 

“But whatever comes, Peleg, you must be cheer- 
ful, at least in your appearance. If the Indians 
see that you are cast down or afraid, they will im- 
mediately lose their respect for you, and no one can 
tell what may happen.” 

In a measure the words of the scout proved to 
be true. The prisoners were treated with kindness 
and were assigned to various members of the tribe 
[ 193 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

in such a manner that they seldom had an oppor- 
tunity of conversing with one another. 

Mindful of the directions of the great scout, 
Peleg did his utmost to maintain a cheerful manner. 
He was confident, too, as the days passed, that 
however heavy his own heart might be the Shaw- 
nees were sure that he was adapting himself to the 
life of their tribe and was not unhappy in their 
midst. 

A few days after the captives had been brought 
into the village, Owaneeyo came to Boone one 
morning and said: “Big scout shoot. No shoot 
brave, shoot 99 

The word which he wished to use failed the 
young chief, but laughing heartily he conducted 
the hunter to a place where Daniel Boone saw that 
a target had been erected. He concluded that 
the plan of the Indian was for him to enter into a 
contest with some of the best shots among the 
Shawnees. 

With apparent eagerness he accepted the invi- 
tation, and soon many of the warriors were as- 
sembled, keenly watching the contest between 
Boone and three of the braves. 

Daniel Boone wisely was shooting well, but not 
too well. Two of his competitors he easily outdid, 
but the third, who was Owaneeyo himself, and no 
mean shot, he permitted to beat him. The glee 
[ 194 ] 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 


of the Indian when the match was ended was so 
marked and childish that Boone instantly decided 
that if future contests of a similar character were held 
he knew what his own course of action must be. 

The following day a second contest was ar- 
ranged, and at Boone’s suggestion Peleg also was 
summoned to share in it. 

“Lad,” whispered Boone, while he was appar- 
ently bending over his rifle and looking to its 
priming, “I am sure if we are careful we shall soon 
be permitted to have our own rifles. Perhaps you 
can get yours now for the match, if you want it, 
but my advice to you in any event is to let the 
Indians beat you, but not too easily.” 

The delight of the Indians was even greater 
than on the preceding day, when Owaneeyo and 
one of his warriors succeeded in making a better 
! record than Peleg and were tied with the work 
which the scout did. 

At frequent intervals throughout the autumn 
these contests were held. In every event the 
white scouts were careful to shoot well, but not 
too well. So manifest was the feeling of affection 
and confidence among the Shawnees, especially for 
Daniel Boone, that it was not long before the white 
men, one or two at a time, were permitted to ac- 
company the Indians whenever they went on the 
hunting path. 


[ 195 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

In this manner the winter passed and already 
there were promises of the return of spring. March 
had come and the snows were beginning to disap- 
pear from the depths of the forest. It was in this 
month that Owaneeyo came to Daniel Boone one 
day, saying eagerly: “Broder go with Shawnees.” { 

“Go where?” inquired Boone. His anxiety for 
his family in their faraway home by the Kentucky 
by this time had become almost unbearable. As 
they were unaware of the fate which had befallen 
him and his companions, and yet were fully aware 
of the cruelty of the Indians and the hatred which 
they had manifested for the settlers at Boones- 
borough, the scout was continually thinking of the 
anxiety which must possess his own family at this 
time. Not a word had come to them concerning 
his safety or his whereabouts, and there was no 
means by which such word might be sent. It was 
therefore with a feeling of consternation which it 
was difficult for him to conceal that he heard the 
statement of the young chief. 

“Broder see where go,” laughed the Indian, as if 
he was preserving some great pleasure for his 
friend. 

Aware that protests were vain, Boone, with appar- 
ent cordiality, expressed his desire to accompany the 
Indians, although he was ignorant of the destina- 
tion of the proposed journey. 

[ 196 ] 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 

To his surprise, the following day when the party 
set forth from the village, he found Peleg and nine 
other whites in the company. 

There was no opportunity, however, for conver- 
sation among the captives, who, in spite of the 
freedom which of late had been granted them by 
the Shawnees, now were watched more carefully 
as the warriors sped through the forest. 

When the band at last arrived at Detroit, Boone 
was not surprised at the destination. Here sev- 
eral days elapsed before Owaneeyo expressed his 
purpose to return. Just why Boone had been com- 
pelled to accompany the Indians the scout did not 
yet understand. 

However, on the day before their departure, Gov- 
ernor Hamilton summoned Owaneeyo and Daniel 
Boone to his quarters. 

After a few preliminary words the Governor said 
to the Indian: “I will give you £100 for the ransom 
of this man.” 

A scowl instantly appeared upon the face of the 
chief and he turned as if about to depart from the 
presence of the Governor. 

Wheeling abruptly about, however, his eyes shin- 
ing and an expression upon his face which showed 
how deep his feeling was, he said: “No sell broder. 
He my broder.” As he spoke, Owaneeyo looked 
steadily into the eyes of the scout, and there was 
[ 197 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


no question in the mind of Daniel Boone as to the 
sincerity of the young chief’s feelings. 

“ But he is a white man,” protested the Governor. 

“He my broder,” declared Owaneeyo, as if no 
further explanation need be made. 

“Ask him if he would rather go with you or stay 
here.” 

“I would rather go,” said Daniel Boone, “than 
have you pay so much gold for my release. The 
Shawnees have been good to me, and though I am 
a white man, my own friends and country could 
not deal more kindly with me than have Owaneeyo 
and his tribe.” 

“No take gold,” said Owaneeyo, and strode from 
the Governor’s quarters as he spoke. 

Boone delayed a few minutes, explaining to the 
Governor that it would be impossible for him to 
accept such a ransom, saying in his simple way: 
“I am in the hands of a greater Governor than even 
you, Governor Hamilton, and I am sure that the 
right in the end will be done.” 

Apparently the commander was not yet fully 
persuaded, for on the following morning, before 
the Shawnees departed from Detroit, several of the 
Englishmen at the post, deeply touched with sym- 
pathy for the scout in his captivity, came to Boone 
himself with offerings of money for his release. 
The sturdy scout smiled, however, and shook his 
[ 198 ] 


AN OFFER OF RELEASE 

head, explaining that it would be impossible for 
him to accept such benefits which would forever be 
beyond his power to return or repay. 

“But you need never return the money to us. 
It may be our turn to be prisoners of the Indians 
soon, and then some one will have to do for us what 
we now are trying to do for you,” protested one 
of the men. 

“I cannot take your gifts,” said the hunter 
shortly. It was manifest that all efforts to induce 
him to change his decision would be fruitless. 

In a few hours the entire band of Shawnees and 
their captives set forth on their return to Chilli- 
cothe. No reference was made by Owaneeyo to the 
offer which had been made by the Governor and 
his friends, but it was plain to Daniel Boone 
throughout their long march that the chief’s feeling 
of affection for him had been greatly strengthened 
by what had occurred at Detroit. 

However, when the party at last arrived at the 
Indian town, even Daniel Boone was startled by 
the proposition which was made by one of the 
Shawnee chiefs. 


[ 199 ] 


CHAPTER XXI 


FLIGHT 

W HAT do you think, Peleg?” inquired 
Boone a few days after the return from 
Detroit. “Blackfish wishes to adopt me 
into his family.” 

“What!” exclaimed Peleg in amazement. 

“Yes. One of his sons was killed not long ago 
and he wishes me to take his place. I do not know 
how much older my foster-father will be than I 
am. As a rule I think it is wise for a father to be 
a little older than his son,” added Boone quizzi- 
cally. “But it won’t make any great difference 
in this case.” 

“You are not going to allow it, are you?” re- 
peated Peleg. 

“I must. Blackfish seems to be very fond of 
me, and since we came back from Detroit, Owan- 
eeyo has spread many reports of my devotion to 
the tribe. He little realizes what restraint I have 
had to put upon myself, and how there are times 
when it seems to me that I would almost give my 
life for the privilege of looking upon the faces of my 
[ 200 ] 


FLIGHT 


family once more. It will never do for me to re- 
fuse.” 

Peleg said no more, but in spite of the scout’s 
information he was scarcely prepared for the 
“ adoption” which followed in a short time. 

In the presence of the family of Blackfish and of 
some of the leading warriors of the tribe, a good 
deal of hair was pulled from the head of Boone, 
leaving his scalp-lock not unlike that of the In- 
dians. His body then was bathed in several waters, 
the medicine-men who performed the act claiming 
that in this way his white blood was washed away, 
and he became essentially a Shawnee in nature as 
well as in name. A feast followed the formality of 
adoption, and then Daniel Boone was given a name 
— “The Man with the Long Rifle” — and formally 
declared to be a son of the great Chief Blackfish. 

There was a slight change in the treatment which 
Boone and his companions received after this 
event. The increasing confidence of the Indians 
was manifest, and found its most complete expres- 
sion when a few days afterward they sent Boone, 
together with two or three white men and a score 
of warriors, to the springs of the Sciota to make salt. 

Upon their return from this expedition Boone 
was alarmed as well as astonished by the appear- 
ance of the Shawnee braves. Many of them were 
daubed in their war paint, and it was apparent on 
[ 201 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

every side that the warriors were preparing for 
battle. 

It was not difficult for the great scout to learn 
that the object of the campaign was to take the 
little settlement on the Kentucky, where his home 
was located. 

Familiar as he was with the Indian customs, 
Boone was aware that more extensive preparations 
than he had yet seen would be made before the 
warriors started on the warpath. Meanwhile, he 
was determined to escape from the Indian village, 
and return with his warning to his friends on the 
Kentucky. 

In spite of the freedom he enjoyed, he knew that 
it would be extremely difficult for him to escape. 
At least one hundred and sixty miles of forest and 
wilderness intervened between the village and 
Boonesborough. To obtain supplies of food, or 
weapons by which he might defend himself from 
beasts and warriors, was well-nigh impossible. 

Nevertheless the determined man decided to try 
to escape from the Shawnees at the first favour- 
able opportunity. He was fully aware that he 
must not do anything to arouse the suspicions of 
the tribe. Yet the time of the departure of the 
warriors could not be far distant. 

Meanwhile, he talked over these matters in the 
occasional interviews he was permitted to have 
[ 202 ] 


FLIGHT 


with Peleg. Almost all the younger scout knew, 
however, was that his friend had determined, when 
the proper time arrived, to flee from the village 
and warn the settlers of their peril. It was also 
understood that, after the departure of the scout, 
if Peleg should see the least opportunity, he, too, 
would attempt to leave the Indian village. 

When June came the great scout saw that the 
men were preparing for a march within a few days. 
Whatever he was to do must be done quickly. No 
opportunity had been granted for a further word 
with his young friend, when early one morning 
Boone fled from Chillicothe. 

A small piece of jerked venison was all the food 
he had been able to take with him on his long 
journey. He was without rifle or knife and before 
him stretched a pathless forest through which he 
must flee one hundred and sixty miles before he 
again would be among his friends! No one knew 
better than Boone himself that it was to be a race 
for life, for pursuit on the morrow was as certain 
as the rising of the sun. 

Nevertheless with the same quiet courage which 
had ever been the great scout’s strong reliance, he 
struck out for the Ohio River. Through the deep 
forests, over the high crags and rocks, across the 
creeks and following the courses of the river, by 
day and by night, he forced his tireless way. 

[ 203 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Success crowned his efforts at last, and he gained 
the shores of the Ohio. But when he arrived upon 
the bank he found the river full and at least a mile 
in width. 

Unable to swim, for a time the scout was un- 
certain what his next move should be. Fortu- 
nately, he found, on the bank near the place where 
he was standing, an old canoe which had been 
driven against the shore. Although the little craft 
was untrustworthy, one end having been badly 
broken, the intrepid man succeeded in paddling his 
way in it to the opposite bank. 

Four days and four nights the scout had been 
running with only an occasional brief respite. 
Throughout that time he had eaten but one meal. 
His strength was failing, but his hope was strong, 
for Daniel Boone was aware now that he was near 
to his home. At last the quaint fort was seen be- 
fore him and the end of the journey had been 
gained. 

The return of the scout was almost like that of 
one who had come back from the dead. Every 
man in the little settlement had believed that 
Daniel Boone was to be seen no more. No tidings 
had come from faraway Chillicothe, and no one 
in Boonesborough had any means of knowing what 
had befallen the party in their labours at Blue 
Licks. 


[ 204 ] 


FLIGHT 


4 ‘Where is my wife? Where are my children?” 
demanded Boone as soon as he entered the fort. 

“ Gone,” answered Sam Oliver, who at the time was 
making one of his occasional visits at the settlement. 

“‘Gone!’” repeated Boone in astonishment. 
“‘Gone!’ Where?” 

“Your wife and all your children except Jemima 
have gone back to North Carolina. They all 
believed you to be dead and your wife felt that she 
could no longer remain here. Jemima is the only 
one that stayed.” 

It was not long before the scout found his in- 
trepid daughter, who in spite of the departure of 
the other members of the family had been strong 
in her conviction that either her father would re- 
turn or some definite word concerning his fate 
would be received. For that reason she had re- 
mained in the fort. 

Not a moment was to be lost. Weary, indeed 
almost exhausted by his long flight, as soon as food 
and a brief rest had been obtained Boone at once 
helped the little garrison to work day and night 
upon their fortifications. New gates were made 
and double bastions were speedily completed. The 
horses and cattle were driven in from the fields, and 
powder and balls prepared. Before ten days had 
elapsed the fort was in readiness for the coming of 
the enemy. 


[20 5 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Early in the morning of the final day, while 
Daniel Boone was himself on guard, he discovered a 
man approaching from the forest. Keenly watch- 
ing the indistinct figure and prepared for instant 
action, although as yet he had not summoned any 
of his companions, Boone soon was aware that the 
returning man was none other than his friend 
Peleg. 

The young scout was admitted by Boone, and in 
response to his queries he was soon describing what 
had befallen him. 

In the midst of the excitement which had fol- 
lowed the escape of Boone, Peleg found the oppor- 
tunity for which he himself had been waiting, and 
he, too, fled from the little village. In some ways, 
however, he had been more successful than his 
friend, inasmuch as he had been able to secure both 
Singing Susan and some ammunition, together 
with a hunting-knife. 

“Have they followed you, lad?” inquired Boone 
eagerly. 

“I do not know. They were filled with the plan 
of attacking the fort and I do not know whether 
anything has been done to turn them aside from it. 
I have had many trials,” continued the young scout. 
“If I had not found the circles of stones which you 
left I could not have followed your trail. I do not 
know how you crossed the Ohio.” 

[ 206 ] 


FLIGHT 


“I found an old canoe,” explained Boone. 

“That makes everything plain, then,” laughed 
Peleg, “for I used the same canoe. Some one 
must have brought it back or it had floated down 
stream; at any rate it saved me from getting 
Singing Susan wet. The first place I found your 
stones was about two miles from the river, at the 
spring where there is a little waterfall. I can’t 
tell you what it meant to me, for I was not sure of 
my way. I tried to think of everything you had 
told me about the stars, the course of the streams, 
and the changes in the trees, and then every little 
while I climbed to the top of a hill when I came 
near one and got my bearings from there.” 

“You are here, lad,” said Boone. “You were 
led as I was. That is enough. Now tell me about 
the Shawnees. Are they coming?” 

“I think so, but the attack will be delayed 
several weeks.” 

“Why is that?” 

“Because you escaped. They tried their best 
to overtake you, but when Owaneeyo and some of 
the other warriors of the tribe came back and said 
they had not found you, then Blackfish declared 
that you would come to the fort here to warn the 
settlers. They then decided, I think, to put off 
their march about three weeks.” 

Boone nodded his head several times as if the 
[ 207 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

explanation Peleg had given was one that com- 
mended itself to his judgment. There was no 
alteration, however, in the plans of the scout for 
strengthening the defences of the little fort. By 
this time the alarm had spread throughout the 
little settlement and every man was alert. 

The delay in the coming of the Shawnees, how- 
ever, continued so long that Boone concluded that 
they might have become discouraged by the re- 
port of their spies concerning the condition of the 
fort. 

Prowling Indians had been seen frequently in 
the vicinity of Boonesborough after the arrival of 
Peleg, and the scout now decided that it would be 
a good plan for him to turn the tables and with a 
party invade the country of the Shawnees them- 
selves. 

Choosing nineteen men from the little garrison, 
he led them swiftly and silently as far as Paint Creek 
on the Sciota. He had come within four miles of 
the little Indian village, when unexpectedly the 
band met a party of thirty warriors, who were 
marching to join the expedition against Boones- 
borough. 

There was no opportunity for retreat or deliber- 
ation. Instantly Boone called upon his compan- 
ions to follow his example and fired upon the 
astonished warriors. 


[208] 


FLIGHT 


The Shawnees without attempting to respond, 
and doubtless unaware of the numbers of their 
enemies, immediately turned and fled. 

The scout now halted his forces and sent two spies 
to discover what was taking place in the village. 
The men returned with the information that it had 
been abandoned. 

As soon as this information had been received, 
Boone summoned his followers and said to them: 
“I am convinced from the reports of our friends 
that a great army of the Indians is now marching 
against Boonesborough. Our friends are in almost 
as great danger as are we. There is nothing left 
for us except to return and make the best possible 
time in our march.” 

Every one assented to the suggestion and the 
return was begun, the men marching day and night, 
hoping to elude the Indians, who, the scout now 
believed, were between them and Boonesborough. 

It was not long before the returning band dis- 
covered the trail of the advancing warriors. There- 
upon the leader decided to make a detour and avoid 
his enemies. All unknown to the Indians, on the 
sixth day of the returning march the intrepid 
band passed the red men, and on the seventh ar- 
rived safely at Boonesborough. 

The following day five hundred hideously painted, 
thoroughly armed Indians appeared at the fort. 

[ 209 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

The alarm of the little garrison would have been 
still greater had they known that Duquesne, for 
whom Fort Pitt was first named, was in command 
of the entire band. Even Blackfish for the time 
had resigned his position as leader, preferring to 
have the skilful Frenchman assume the command 
in the attack on the fort. Nor was Captain Du- 
quesne alone, for twelve of his countrymen also 
were with him to assist in leading the savages in 
their attack. 


[ 810 ] 


CHAPTER XXII 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

P ELEG, ” said Daniel Boone after the ap- 
pearance of the enemy in front of the fort, 
“I understand now why it was that I was 
so long a prisoner of the Shawnees. ” 

Peleg expressed his question without replying 
in words and the hunter continued: “If I had not 
been a captive I never should have known how strong 
they are nor what their plans might be. And I 
think, too, that I never should have known what 
the relation is between the Shawnees and the 
French.” 

“Do you think we can hold this place?” inquired 
Peleg anxiously. 

“We shall do our best, lad, and the result is not 
altogether in our hands. I have sent messengers all 
through the settlements asking for reinforcements. ” 
The conversation was interrupted by the ap- 
pearance of a messenger from the attacking army — 
a white man. Before he arrived at the stockade 
he was hailed by Daniel Boone, who, with Peleg, 
was standing on one of the bastions. 

[ 211 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

After a few preliminary words the man said: “I 
am instructed by Captain Duquesne to state to 
you that he has received orders from Governor 
Hamilton at Detroit to take this fort, but to save 
the lives of the people, if it is possible so to do.” 

Boone gazed down into the face of the speaker, 
but did not reply. 

“I am further instructed by Captain Duquesne,” 
resumed the messenger, “to ask you to send nine 
men from the fort to arrange for a treaty. You 
can meet the men from our army wherever you 
desire. ” 

“I shall report to you as soon as I have consulted 
my friends,” said Daniel Boone as he and his com- 
panion retired to the fort. 

When the defenders were assembled Sam Oliver 
declared hotly: “I should never send nine men out 
to meet the redskins ! It is one of their tricks, and 
not one of the nine will ever come back. ” 

“I do not feel that way about it,” said Boone. 
“I suspect that it may be a trick, as you suggest, 
but it may help us to put off the beginning of the 
fight until some of the other settlers for whom we 
have sent can come to our aid. I favour sending 
a delegation of nine men to meet a delegation 
from the Indians, but the place must be within fire 
from the fort. I do not know how you feel, but for 
myself I am willing to say that we shall never sur- 
[ 212 ] 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

render this place while there is one man left alive 
to defend it. ” 

“That’s the way we all feel,” said Sam Oliver, 
who still opposed the proposed meeting. 

Daniel Boone returned to the bastions and an- 
nounced to the messenger that nine men would 
meet a party from the Indians in accordance with 
the proposition which had been made for the con- 
ference. 

Selecting eight of his followers, the scout led the 
way to the appointed place of meeting, which was 
sixty yards from the fort. There the little band 
met Captain Duquesne and eighteen or twenty In- 
dians. The red warriors were silent, but their flash- 
ing eyes impressed the scout more than any words 
could have dome. 

“What we propose,” began Captain Duquesne, 
“is that every man in the fort shall swear alle- 
giance to King George the Third and submit to our 
rule. If this can be done we can assure you that 
you may live in peace and retain all your property.” 

Boone, who was the spokesman of the settlers, 
arose to reply. He knew little of the great 
struggle which at that time was going on for the 
independence of the colonies. His life on the 
border was too remote from the battlefields of the 
north and east, and only occasional rumours of the 
long contest came to the pioneers. 

[ 213 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Boone’s speech, conditionally agreeing to Du- 
quesne’s proposal, was followed by one from 
Blackfish. The old chief, looking only once upon 
his adopted son, and by the gleam in his eyes ex- 
pressing his hatred, asserted that when two great 
armies entered into a treaty it was customary for 
the men to shake hands, and in doing so for two 
Indians to shake the hands of each white man. 
There were smiles among the men from the fort as 
they heard the smooth words of the crafty old 
chief, but as all the warriors and white men were 
unarmed they were not unduly alarmed. 

At that moment a gun was fired as a signal from 
the forest, and the Indian members of the council, 
advancing with open hands, grasped the hands of 
the white men. Instantly the warriors endeavoured 
to drag their white enemies toward the woods where 
many of the Shawnees were concealed. A des- 
perate conflict followed, and the Indians from 
the main body begun to rush quickly toward the 
spot. 

At the same time the watching men at the fort 
began to pour a fire upon the approaching enemy, 
and in a few minutes, under stress of the excite- 
ment, the scout and his friends tore themselves 
from the grasp of the Indians and fled back to the 
fort. The heavy gate was closed and bolted as 
soon as they were behind the defences. Fortu- 
[ 214 ] 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

nately only one man had been wounded by the 
fire of the savages. 

Captain Duquesne and Blackfish now ordered 
an attack upon the fort. As the place was almost 
surrounded by woods except on the side toward the 
river, the attacking party was well protected. The 
advance was made from three sides at once. 

Amid the wild yells of the Indians a volley of 
bullets was poured into the fort, and as soon as 
the guns were discharged they were again loaded 
and a steady fire maintained. 

The defenders of the fort, however, were not 
wasting their scanty ammunition. Every man 
from his porthole, or the place which he was occu- 
pying on the bastions, was selecting his own 
special mark and every shot was telling in the work 
of death. The fight continued throughout the 
day, and when night fell, contrary to their custom, 
the Indians still maintained their attack. 

Another day and another night followed, with- 
out any break in the struggle. Daniel Boone was 
aware that the Indians were now being guided by 
Captain Duquesne and were not following their 
usual custom of abandoning an attack when dark- 
ness fell. Meanwhile Boone was moving from place 
to place encouraging his men and making sure 
that all things were well. 

Jemima Boone, by the direction of her father, was 

[ 215 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

firing through one of the portholes. In the second 
day of the fight a negro, who had fled from the fort, 
climbed into a tree near by, fired at the girl and 
wounded her. 

Daniel Boone, who at the moment was standing 
near his daughter, instantly peered through the 
porthole, discovered the deserter, and the report 
of his rifle was followed by the fall of the man from 
the tree in which he had hidden. 

Day followed day and still the attack was main- 
tained. The Indians were unable to force an en- 
trance into the place, but they were unwilling to 
abandon the attack. 

One afternoon Peleg came to Daniel Boone and, 
greatly excited, said: “Come with me!” 

Leading the way to the side of the fort which 
faced the river, he called the attention of the scout 
to the colour of the water. 

“What does that mean?” inquired Peleg. 

“It means that the varmints are trying to dig a 
trench from the bank of the river to the fort,” said 
Boone. “The earth they have thrown out has 
coloured the water. If they once get inside the 
fort they may compel us to surrender.” 

“What can we do?” inquired Peleg. “We must 
do something!” 

“Come, I will show you,” replied Boone quietly. 

Selecting several men to aid Peleg in his task, 

[ 216 ] 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

he soon arranged for a counter trench to be dug 
which would cross that which the Indians were 
digging. Nor was it long before the discovery of 
the work of the defenders caused the red men to 
abandon their scheme. 

More furiously than before, the siege was con- 
tinued. A new device was tried by the Indians on 
the fifth day. 

Arrows with burning brands attached to them 
were shot in such a manner that they struck the 
roofs of the houses within the fort. It was im- 
possible for any one to prevent this work. 

At last a cry was raised that the fort itself was on 
fire. The cry, terrifying as it was, instantly brought 
Henry to the front, who said calmly: “I put out 
flame.” 

For a moment every gun and voice within the 
fort was silent while the anxious inmates watched 
Henry as he made his way to the roof where the 
fire already was kindled. A wild yell from the 
Indians greeted the appearance of the young man 
and a shower of bullets fell all about him. 

Undismayed by his peril, Henry succeeded in 
making his way to the blazing arrow, flung it to 
the ground, and succeeded in putting out the fire. 
As he turned to make his way back to his friends 
another shower of bullets fell about him, and a 
groan escaped the watching defenders when they 
[ 217 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


saw the young hero suddenly lose his grasp upon 
the roof, and after a brief struggle roll to the ground 
outside the walls. 

The numbers of those who had fallen within the 
fort had not been great, protected as they were by 
its wall and also by their own continued vigilance. 
The ranks of the assailants, however, steadily had 
been thinned, and on the ninth day, without any 
warning to the defenders, the attacking Shawnees 
withdrew from the place. 

Peleg was engaged in his duties in the fort on 
the morning following the siege when the scout 
approached him and, in response to the enthusi- 
astic words of the boy, smiled as he said: “Well, 
we did pretty well, lad. We lost only two and had 
only four wounded.” 

“And Henry was one of the killed,” suggested 
Peleg. 

“I do not know. He has not been found,” re- 
plied Boone. “If one had to die I think Henry was 
the best one to go.” In response to a look of in- 
quiry from the boy, the scout continued: “He 
had no family; his white blood prevented him from 
being entirely at home among the Indians, while 
his Indian bringing-up would have prevented him 
forever from feeling that he was one of us. There 
were times when I was afraid for the life of Sam 
Oliver, so bitter was Henry’s hatred of him.” 

[ 218 ] 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

“Do you know how many of the Indians were 
killed?” 

“It is reported that thirty-seven were killed and 
a great many wounded. It is difficult to say just 
what the losses were, because the Indians always 
carry away their dead and wounded.” 

“Do you think they will come back again?” 

The scout shook his head as he said: “The 
country hereabouts is increasing so rapidly in its 
population, and there are so many other stations 
now between Boonesborough and the Ohio, that I 
hardly think they will attack us again. Certainly 
not in the near future.” 

“How is Jemima this morning?” asked Peleg. 

“She will be all right in a few days,” replied 
Boone. “ It was only a flesh wound in the shoulder 
that she received.” 

“What are you planning to do next?” 

“If you agree,” replied Daniel Boone, “I shall 
leave you in charge of my farm and start as soon 
as I can for North Carolina, to bring back my 
family.” 

It was not long before the scout set forth alone 
on his journey to the Yadkin, whither his wife had 
gone with all her children except Jemima, to find a 
refuge in her father’s house, after she had become 
convinced that Daniel Boone had been killed by 
the Indians. 


[ 219 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

The journey was successfully made and the com- 
ing of Boone was to his wife almost like the return 
of one from the dead. There were some matters 
on the Yadkin, however, which prevented their 
immediate departure, and it was not until several 
weeks had elapsed that the scout with his family 
returned to Boonesborough. 

Meanwhile Peleg had looked carefully after the 
farm which his friend owned, and he received warm 
words of praise for his efforts when Boone came 
back. 

As soon as the scout saw that his family once 
more was established in the settlement, and the 
attacks of the Indians, for a time at least, had 
ceased, with his brother, who also now had joined 
the settlers, he once more started for Blue Licks 
to make salt, of which the settlers and their cattle 
were greatly in need. 

“Are you not afraid to go to the Blue Licks?” 
inquired his brother when Boone was ready to set 
forth on his expedition. 

“Why should I be?” inquired Boone. 

“It was there that you were taken by the In- 
dians.” 

“They say,” replied the scout with a smile, 
“that lightning never strikes twice in the same 
place. I am not afraid. I think the Shawnees 
have been taught a good lesson. Colonel Bowman 
[ 220 ] 


THE COMING OF BLACKFISH 

and his one hundred and sixty men, though he 
was not very successful in his attack upon old 
Chillicothe, nevertheless showed the Indians that 
we were not unmindful of their plans. And Col- 
onel Harrod at all events, when he made his attack 
with the horsemen, certainly scattered the Indians 
on every side. I think they will remember both 
men, although I wish that we might have inflicted 
greater damage upon their village. The report is 
that only two scalps were taken, but that may 
mean very little. The attacks which Colonel Bird, 
with his five hundred Indians and Canadians, made 
upon Riddle’s Station and the little station upon 
the Licking River, seem to me to show that the 
Indians are not ready to give up yet.” 

Boone’s assurance overcame the objections of 
his brother and persuaded him that there was no 
special danger attending their labours at Blue Licks. 

The confidence of the scout seemed warranted 
when several days had passed, the necessary salt 
had been made, and the two men were preparing to 
return to the fort. Not an Indian had been seen, 
nor had there been any signs of their presence. 

Hardly had the two men, however, set forth on 
their return when, without warning, they were 
attacked by a band of Indians. Boone’s brother 
was killed and scalped. But the scout instantly 
darted into the thickest part of the forest. Owing 
[ 221 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

to his superior knowledge of the country he was not 
overtaken at once; and running steadily and as 
swiftly as he was able, he at last sought refuge in a 
ravine, followed by a dog which the Indians were 
using to trail him. Boone waited quietly until the 
savage animal approached and then calmly shot it. 

Aware that the report of his rifle would reveal 
his presence to his enemies, the intrepid man, as 
the woods about him were dense and darkness was 
approaching, resolutely made his way into the 
forest again and resumed his flight toward Boones- 
borough. 


[ 222 ] 


CHAPTER XXIII 


FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE 

W ITH his usual coolness and fortitude, 
the great scout continued on his way, and 
without further trouble arrived at the fort. 
“Peleg,” he said the following day, when the 
two were labouring in the field together, “Blue 
Licks somehow seems to be destined to be a place 
of trouble and sorrow for me. Only a few days 
ago my brother was calling my attention to that 
fact and now his death has confirmed his words. 
It grieves me that I could not even bring away his 
body. That, however, is a part of the fortune of pio- 
neers, and as no man ever yet has heard me whine, 
I do not intend to begin now. But my brother’s 
death is a source of very heavy sorrow to me. ” 
“Do you think the Indians are planning another 
attack?” 

“Not right away. I suspect that they are try- 
ing to attack or capture me. Their anger against 
the settlement doubtless is as keen as ever, but 
they look upon me as one who has deserted their 
tribe. Some day they will find me. But I have 
[ 223 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

one consolation, and that is that they will not find 
me unprepared. ” 

The words of the scout concerning the further 
attacks by the Indians were confirmed during 
the year that followed. The little settlement at 
Boonesborough steadily increased in numbers and 
prosperity. For a time, free from the attacks of 
the Indians, the families toiled in their fields. 
More extensive clearings were made and in the 
marvellously fertile soil the crops were bountiful. 
There were many new homes established in the 
community, too, for among the continually arriv- 
ing settlers were many young women. 

In the quiet labours on his clearing Boone found 
peace and comfort such as he seldom had enjoyed. 
Peleg, who had secured some land adjoining the 
farm of his friend, worked with the scout and 
Israel, and as they assisted one another both 
places steadily improved. 

The feeling of Boone, however, that he was still 
an object of hatred among the Shawnees was con- 
firmed repeatedly. His most critical experience 
came one day when, all unknown to the scout, 
four athletic Shawnees were detailed by Blackfish 
to approach the settlement without arousing any 
suspicions of their presence, watch the movements 
of the scout, and either bring him back to the tribe 
or bring his scalp. 


[ 224 ] 


FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE 

On his farm the scout had erected, not far from 
his cabin, a little house in which he dried the to- 
bacco he cultivated. The little building stood in 
the midst of his tobacco patch. Within the house 
there were three tiers of timber from which the to- 
bacco leaves were hanging to dry. 

Boone and Peleg were busily engaged here one 
autumn day, almost unmindful of peril, the younger 
scout believing that the fears of his friend were 
without foundation. 

“The tobacco on this lower tier,” said Boone 
after he had made a careful investigation, “seems 
to be entirely dry. ” 

“Then we had better change the sticks to the 
tier above,” responded Peleg. “That will leave 
plenty of room for the leaves we have not brought 
in as yet. ” 

“That’s a good suggestion,” answered Boone, 
and together the two scouts began to transfer the 
sticks from the lower to the second tier. 

Peleg departed from the building to bring in 
more of the tobacco leaves and left Boone standing 
on the poles that separated the upper tiers. 

Suddenly as the scout glanced below him he saw 
four Shawnee warriors stealthily enter through the 
door and laugh as they looked up to him. 

“You no get away some more,” said one of them 
whom Boone recognized as Owaneeyo. “We take 
[ 225 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

you to Chillicothe this time. You no cheat us some 
more. ” 

Every one of the savages was armed and looking 
up into Boone’s face, while the direction in which 
the guns were aimed added force to this declara- 
tion. 

Not for a moment losing his self-control, and 
aware that he was in the greatest peril of his life, 
Boone’s careful preparation now showed its value. 
“Ah!” said he quietly. “Glad to see you, my 
friends. How have you been this long time?” 

“Been heap mad,” said Owaneeyo, frowning in 
a manner which betrayed his rising anger. “You 
come down.” 

“I shall be very glad to go with you, my friends. 
Tell me, how is Blackfish these days?” 

“You come down!” repeated Owaneeyo. 

“I just told you,” said Boone, “that I shall be 
glad to come down. I prefer, however, to have 
you wait until I finish with my tobacco.” In the 
hunter’s heart there was hope that Peleg would 
discover his predicament and bring him aid before 
he should be seized by the angry warriors. 

“Make yourselves comfortable,” continued 
Boone pleasantly. “You see I cannot get down 
from here and I cannot get away from you.” The 
scout paused a moment and glanced at his would- 
be captors. 


[226] 


FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE 

You like tobacco ? ’ ’ he resumed . 4 ‘ When I have 
this cured I will give some of it to you and we will 
smoke together.” 

The Indians were becoming impatient, and 
plainly were unaware of what the scout was doing. 
Continuing his conversation and making more 
inquiries concerning his friends in the Indian town, 
he did his utmost to hold the attention of his danger- 
ous visitors while he gathered together some armfuls 
of tobacco. 

Carefully arranging the bundles of the dry to- 
bacco between the poles and standing where he 
was able to look directly down into the faces of his 
enemies, Boone suddenly cut the strings by which 
the sticks of tobacco were held. At the same mo- 
ment, with his arms full of the dried leaves, he 
leaped down upon the Indians, and instantly filled 
their mouths and eyes with dry tobacco dust. 
The Shawnees were blinded and well-nigh suffo- 
cated in the little tobacco house. There were 
sneezes and shouts and cries from the startled war- 
riors, who now were unable to see even the direc- 
tion in which the door was located. 

Darting from the little house, the scout made his 
escape and ran swiftly to his cabin. In a moment 
he seized his trusty rifle, but as he returned to 
the tobacco house he saw the Indians running 
blindly and staggering toward the woods. 

[m] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Boone restrained his impulse to fire upon the 
fleeing warriors, and called to Peleg and Israel, 
who with several of the younger members of the 
settlement were now hurriedly approaching, all of 
them prepared to pursue the departing Shawnees. 

“Do not go after them!” called Boone. 

Reluctantly the young men halted, and Peleg 
said: “Why do you not want us to chase them? 
We might have had every one of them.” 

“If the Shawnees do not go on the warpath, why 
should we?” 

“They were on the warpath for you!” said Israel. 
“It was lucky you got away.” 

Boone laughed silently as he recalled the ap- 
pearance of the Indians when he had thrown the 
tobacco dust into their faces. “I am sure,” he 
said, “the Shawnees will remember what I said 
to them and how they were treated by me. Per- 
haps it will do more good than it will to shoot 
them.” 

The months passed and the peace of the settle- 
ment remained unbroken. Few even suspected the 
terrible struggle which was awaiting them. 

The game in the forest was becoming somewhat 
scarce. The settlers, increasing steadily in num- 
bers, now were scattered from the Kentucky River 
to the Ohio. It was commonly believed that 
the Indians had finally accepted the coming of the 
[ 228 ] 


FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE 

whites as inevitable, and no longer were ready to 
dispute their occupation of the western forests. 

The one marked exception was Daniel Boone. 
To all the assertions of his friends he replied by 
expressing his own conviction that the red men 
were simply biding their time. No one was more 
familiar with the Indian ways and thoughts than 
the scout and he was positive that they had not 
forgotten the injuries which they had sustained 
at the hands of the whites. Sooner or later they 
would strive to obtain vengeance and at the same 
time unite in a supreme endeavour to drive the 
hated people from the lands which they believed 
to be their own. 

“I am more convinced than ever that trouble is 
brewing,” said Boone one day to Peleg and Israel, 
who now were his frequent companions. “I know 
Simon Girty, and a worse man never lived. He is 
a renegade and a traitor. He has given up living 
among the whites, and in everything but colour 
and in their better qualities he has become an 
Indian. I am sure that we shall hear from him 
before many months have passed.” 

Little the great scout dreamed that even while 
he was expressing his opinion to the boys, runners 
at that very time had been sent by Simon Girty 
to many of the northwestern tribes, urging them all 
to lay aside the jealousy they felt for one another 
[ 229 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

and unite in one common cause against the white 
invaders. 

The following spring the storm burst. As the 
pattering raindrops sometimes fall at the beginning 
of a downpour, so among the scattered settle- 
ments a renewal of attacks by prowling bands of 
Indians indicated what was to follow. 

One day when Daniel Boone returned to his 
home he was unusually cast down. He explained 
that he had just learned of an attack which a party 
of twenty-five Wyandottes had made upon Es- 
till’s Station. The warriors had stolen into a little 
cabin which was apart from the others in the 
settlement. They had seized the occupants — 
a woman and her two daughters — and toma- 
hawked and scalped all three. The bodies were still 
warm when they were discovered upon the floor 
of the cabin by neighbours. The scout told what 
followed. 

“Immediately Captain Estill collected a band of 
twenty-five daring men and followed the Indians 
more swiftly than I followed the band which took 
Jemima prisoner. The Wyandottes at first seemed 
to be frightened and began to run, but at last they 
made a stand on one side of a creek, while the 
whites were on the other. They were not more 
than fifty yards apart and every man was sheltered 
behind a tree or rock and firing at any enemy that 
[ 230 ] 


FOUR WARRIORS AND MORE 

could be seen. Captain Estill had lost one third 
of his men and had shot about as many of the 
Indians, but the braves were still returning his 
fire, and showed no signs of leaving. He thought 
if he should keep up that kind of a fight, every one 
at last would be killed, unless perhaps it should 
be the very last white or Indian. 

“Mindful of this, Captain Estill sent out a party 
of six men, led by Lieutenant Miller, telling them 
to creep around and attack the Indians on their 
flank. But the chief was as shrewd as the captain, 
and as soon as he saw that the fire of the whites 
was slowing up in front of him, he instantly made 
a stronger attack upon the men that were left. 
Jumping into the water, they fell upon the captain 
and his men, driving them before them and killing 
a good many. Those who escaped finally got 
back to the Station, and you can readily see how 
alarmed the people are.” 

“What happened to Captain Estill?” inquired 
Israel, greatly shocked by the story of his father. 

“He and eight more of his men were killed, and, 
besides, four were wounded.” 

“That’s more than half that went out, isn’t it?” 
inquired Peleg. 

“Yes,” answered Daniel Boone. 

The report of the misfortune which had over- 
taken the men of Estill’s Station was speedily 
[ 231 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

succeeded by another report no less alarming. A 
band of Indians had crept up to Hoy’s Station and 
there had stolen two little boys. 

Quickly Captain Holder gathered a band of 
seventeen angry men and started in pursuit of the 
Indians. It was not long before he overtook them, 
but he and his men were driven back after more 
than half the party had fallen. 

The alarm now became widespread. The suc- 
cess which had attended the plans of the Indians 
encouraged them to continue their efforts. Some- 
times singly, frequently in small parties, they crept 
close to the settlements and by their stealthy at- 
tacks kept the people in continual alarm. 

There was no one now to dispute the great 
scout’s prophecy that more serious trouble was to 
come. Within a few weeks an army of Indians, 
made up of bands from many of the northwestern 
tribes and numbering nearly six hundred warriors, 
began its march from Chillicothe. 

The renegade Girty was in command. The 
little army moved with great caution, and their 
approach was unsuspected by the whites. One 
August night they arrived at Bryant’s Station, 
surrounded it, and prepared to dash upon the un- 
suspecting people the moment the gates should be 
opened the following morning. 


[ 232 ] 


CHAPTER XXIV 

A DECOY AND AN ATTACK 

T HE fort at Bryant’s Station was for the 
protection of forty cabins placed in paral- 
lel lines upon a little hill on the bank of 
the Elkhorn River. 

All through the night the garrison had been pre- 
paring as soon as daylight came to depart from 
the fort to carry aid to the men at Hoy’s Station. 
A messenger had brought word to Bryant’s Sta- 
tion of the defeat which almost had overwhelmed 
Holder and his men. If Girty’s band of six hun- 
dred Indians had arrived a few hours later they 
would have found in the fort only a few women and 
children, besides a small number of old men, un- 
able to fight. 

Afterward it was learned that the Indians were 
listening all through the night to the sounds of 
the activities within the fort, and when they saw 
the lights gleaming from the blockhouse and the 
cabins they must have suspected that news of 
their coming already had been received by the 
inmates. 


[ 233 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

However, they made no attempt to steal upon 
the fort in the darkness, although Girty and the 
Indian chiefs were planning and arranging their 
attack for the following day. 

For some strange reason many of the forts on the 
border had been built at a considerable distance 
from the springs upon which the people depended 
for their water. The fort at Bryant ’s Station was 
no exception. 

By Girty ’s direction many of the Indians 
placed themselves in hiding, within shot of the 
spring. One hundred selected warriors also were 
stationed at a distance from the spring. The 
latter were ordered to open a sharp fire and make 
their presence known to the garrison. Doubtless 
the hope of the red men was that the actions of 
this party would draw the white defenders from 
their place of safety. 

If their plan succeeded Girty then expected 
that the other band of warriors instantly would 
rush upon the opposite gate of the fort and hew it 
down with their tomahawks while the men were 
chasing the little decoy force. In this manner all 
the leaders of the attacking force expected to make 
their way into the little cabins within the stockade. 

When daybreak came the garrison was almost 
ready to open the gates and march to the assistance 
of their friends at Hoy’s Station. 

[234] 


A DECOY AND AN ATTACK 

Suddenly there was a furious and continued 
discharge of rifles accompanied by such hideous 
yells and screams and whoops that they terrified 
not only the women and children of Bryant’s 
Station, but alarmed even the men, accustomed 
though they were to the methods of Indian war- 
fare. 

Running to the stockade and peering out through 
the loopholes, the startled white men saw before 
them a small band of Indians. These warriors were 
plainly exposed, yelling and making the most insult- 
ing and furious gestures toward the fort. 

All this was so different from their usual custom 
that some of the older men of the fort warned 
their comrades that a trick of some kind was being 
played upon them. 

“It is a decoy party,” said one of the men posi- 
tively. “They will draw you out of the fort and 
before you know it you will find yourselves sur- 
rounded by more than a hundred of those howling 
savages. ” 

“That is right” said another. “My suggestion 
is that we all make for the other side of the fort. I 
believe the Indians are trying to draw us out on 
this side and then attack us on the other.” 

The experiences which many already had had 
with the Indians of the border confirmed the im- 
pression made by the words of the last speaker. 

[ 23 5 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Even the younger men, who were eager to sally 
forth and attack the young warriors that were 
making such a commotion, were held back by the 
suggestion. 

“We cannot protect ourselves very long in the 
fort, ” said one of the men when the defenders had 
been divided into two bands. 

“Why not?” inquired another. 

‘ 4 Because we have no water. There is not enough 
water in the fort to last us thirty hours.” 

“What can we do?” inquired one of the older men 
after a tense silence had followed the statement of 
the speaker. “If we go down to the spring the 
Indians will pick us off, every one. ” 

“Send the women,” suggested another. “They 
go to the spring every morning. The Indians may 
not think we have any suspicion of what they are 
planning to do. If the women and girls go to the 
spring for water just as they usually do the Indians 
will not fire at them. They will want to save all 
their bullets for their attack on this side when our 
men have been drawn out to chase the savages who 
are yelling now on the other side. ” 

“It seems cowardly,” said another man “to ask 
the women to go down to the spring when we know 
it would be sure death for us to go. ” 

“It will not be sure death for the women, and my 
opinion is that not one of them will be harmed,” 
[ 236 ] 


A DECOY AND AN ATTACK 

said the first speaker positively. “At all events we 
can ask them to go and let them say whether they 
will or not. ” 

When the proposition was made to the women 
there were some who made replies not unlike those 
which their male defenders had suggested in the 
council. Some of them said: “If the men were 
afraid that they might be shot, why should they 
ask the women to go in their place?” Then it was 
explained just why the request was made. Im- 
mediately some of the bolder women and girls, 
taking their buckets, opened the gates and started 
toward the spring, which was only a short dis- 
tance from the fort. 

Frightened, the women undoubtedly were, and 
with good reason. But with unbroken lines they 
continued on their way to the spring. One by one 
they knelt and filled their buckets and then joined 
the line which was returning to the fort. 

When the matrons and maids had arrived 
within a few yards of the open gate their terror be- 
came so overpowering that they all began to run 
for the shelter. Many a dusky face had been seen 
on the borders of the forest, but not a shot was 
fired at the bold girls and the women of Bryant’s 
Station when they brought the water from the 
spring to the inmates of the fort. 

“ Now is our time, ” said one of the men, after the 
[ 237 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

return of the women. “ We ought to do two things : 
First we must get some one out of the fort to carry 
word to Boone of the trouble we are having. ” 

“And second? ” inquired one of the company. 

“We must send out some of the younger men to 
attack that decoy party. ” 

“That’s right,” suggested one of the young men 
eagerly. “We must go out and make all the noise 
we can. Then all the other men here in the fort 
can be ready for Girty when he comes, and I know 
he will come.” 

“I will carry the message to Boone,” volun- 
teered one of the younger men named Bell. It was 
arranged that he should depart with the young 
men who were to attack the decoy party, and then 
instead of returning to the fort he should make a 
dash into the forest and try to make his way to 
Boonesborough as speedily as possible. 

The men in the fort were all serious when they 
saw thirteen of their younger companions depart 
from the fort through the gate which opened to- 
ward the place where the decoy party had been seen. 

“Do not chase the varmints too far,” charged 
one of the watching men. 

No response was given to the warning, and as 
soon as the hardy, young settlers had departed the 
gate was closed and the remaining men, cocking 
their guns, took their positions to await the result 
[ 238 ] 


A DECOY AND AN ATTACK 

of the expected attack as soon as it should be 
unmasked. 

It was not long before the report of rifles was 
heard from the distant road, and gradually the 
sound indicated that the men were being decoyed 
farther and farther from the fort. 

“Girty will order an attack on us soon, now that 
the boys have made so much noise,” suggested 
one of the waiting defenders. 

Scarcely had the man spoken when Simon Girty, 
springing from the forest at the head of five 
hundred of his painted warriors, rushed upon the 
western gate of the fort. It was plain that they 
were trying to force their way over the undefended 
palisade. 

The men of the Station had been carefully ar- 
ranged in small divisions; and at the word from 
their leaders they fired upon the approaching 
warriors. The determination of the white men 
and their anxiety for their wives and children served 
to steady the nerve of every man and make of him 
a sharpshooter. 

The consternation of Girty ’s army cannot be 
described. Startled by the unexpected resistance 
and beholding their comrades falling on every side 
of them, with wild cries of anger and dismay the 
painted braves scattered, and in confusion all ran 
back into the sheltering forest. 

[ 239 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Two minutes after the sally not an Indian was to 
be seen, and the party of thirteen young settlers 
returned to the shelter of the fort. 

Every defender of Bryant’s Station, however, 
was aware that this was but the beginning of the 
siege. The attack now was undertaken more in 
accordance with the usual methods of Indian war- 
fare. From behind trees or protected by rocks the 
red men fired upon the defenders whenever any one 
showed himself. And the men of Bryant ’s Station 
were replying to the attack in kind. Not much time 
had elapsed before it was plain that this method of 
warfare was without marked effect on either party. 

By the middle of the afternoon, however, a 
sudden change occurred which instantly altered the 
entire combat. The cause of this change was due 
to the messenger who had been sent from Bryant ’s 
Station as soon as the discovery of the Indians had 
been made. Upon the fleetest horse in the settle- 
ment young Bell had succeeded in making his way 
to Lexington, with news of the dire need of help at 
Bryant’s Station. 

The messenger, however, was keenly disap- 
pointed when he found only the women and children 
and a few old men in the place. He was informed 
that the able-bodied men had all marched to the 
rendezvous at Hoy ’s Station as soon as the knowl- 
edge of Holder’s defeat had been received. 

[ 240 ] 


A DECOY AND AN ATTACK 

Following the direction in which he had been in- 
formed the fighting band had gone, it was not long 
before Bell overtook them and gave them his 
message. 

In the band were sixteen mounted men and 
more than twice that number of men on foot. As 
they set forth in response to Bell’s appeal, their 
courage was strengthened by the report of the 
coming of a force of men from Boone’s Station, 
among whom were Peleg, Israel, and the great 
scout himself. 


[ 241 ] 


CHAPTER XXV 


A FIELD OF CORN 


n A good pace the band was moving stead- 



ily over the rough roadway that led to 


A JL Bryant’s Station. The men were silent 
for the most part, for they had serious work before 
them. What a siege by five hundred Indians was 
likely to be, led by such a man as Simon Girty, re- 
quired no description. The mounted men, how- 
ever, preceding the men on foot, found little on 
their way to indicate the peril of their friends. 

It was late summer now, and already some of 
the leaves of the forest were tinged with the colours 
of autumn. The song of a bird was seldom heard, 
although the locusts were noisily announcing their 
presence in the treetops. 

As the advancing men came nearer the end of 
their journey their precautions increased. The 
men on horseback still led, but were closer to their 
comrades than in the earlier part of the journey. 
The information which the courier had brought 
had been so meagre that the exact location of 
Girty’s band of warriors was not known. Bell had 


[242] 


A FIELD OF CORN 


reported only that Bryant’s Station was besieged 
and that Girty was the leader of the howling horde 
of savages. 

Bryant’s Station was less than a mile and a 
half distant. The advancing men were in a bend 
in the road, on one side of which stretched the 
primeval forest, while on the other one hundred or 
more acres had been cleared and planted to corn. 
The stalks of corn were higher than the head of the 
tallest man in the band. 

“Come on!” called Peleg to Israel and his 
friends. “Let the men who are riding go around 
by the road and we’ll cut across lots through this 
cornfield.” 

The suggestion at once was acted upon, and the 
men on foot, among whom were most of the boys 
and younger men in the rescuing party, ran into 
the cornfield where they were soon concealed from 
the sight of their companions. Around them the 
stalks were standing so high that it would have 
been an easy matter for one not accustomed to 
such places to lose his way. 

Meanwhile, the mounted men continued on 
their way. It was unknown to them, as it was 
also to their companions in the cornfield, that the 
keen-eyed Indians had been aware of the depart- 
ure of the courier from Bryant’s Station. Indeed, 
it was suspected afterward that intentionally the 
[ 243 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

red men had permitted him to proceed through 
their lines. All the warriors apparently were eager 
for the messenger to return and bring the men 
who doubtless would respond to his appeal. 

Consequently, when the mounted men drew near 
the forest opposite the cornfield, they had no in- 
formation or even suspicion that Girty’s warriors, 
concealed behind the trunks of the great trees, 
were awaiting their coming. Steadily advancing, 
the horsemen soon were drawing near the place 
where the ambuscade had been formed. 

Meanwhile, Peleg and Israel, in advance of their 
comrades, had been moving through the cornfield. 
They had arrived at a point which they thought 
must be midway in the great field, when at the 
sound of a gun both young pioneers stopped short, 
and Israel seized Peleg’s arm as his face became 
pale and he said, “What has happened?” 

There was slight need for Peleg to reply to the 
startling question. On the August air arose the 
reports of many rifles and the terrifying whoops of 
the Indians. 

It was impossible for the men in the cornfield to 
see what was occurring in the road. They were 
aware of the attack, of course, and there was 
slight doubt in the mind of any that the entrance 
of the men on foot into the cornfield had been 
seen by their watching enemies. 

[ 244 ] 


A FIELD OF CORN 


“Keep close to me,” said Peleg to his compan- 
ion. “It is every man for himself, now, but I 
want you to stay by me. We will take our chances 
that way.” 

Peleg started when a whoop wilder and fiercer 
than any that had preceded it came from the bend 
in the road. 

“I wonder if they got every man,” whispered 
Israel, his voice trembling in his excitement. “I 
do not believe one of our men suspected there was 
any danger here. Not even my father spoke of it.” 

“Your father does not always speak of his fears. 
If it is possible for any one to get away I am sure 
your father will be safe.” 

“What’s that?” whispered Israel sharply. From 
the sounds it was evident that some at least of the 
mounted men were fleeing from the place. The 
shots of the Indians were plainly heard, and it was 
clear that they were following the fugitives. Per- 
haps a few had contrived to force their way around 
the bend. 

The two anxious young settlers, however, soon 
were recalled to the perils of their own position. 
Suddenly, not far to their right, they heard a rus- 
tling sound, as of the furtive approach of some 
one moving through the standing corn. 

“Drop!” whispered Peleg. “Don’t move! Do 
not say a word!” 


[ 245 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

The two boys cast themselves upon the ground, 
each holding his rifle in readiness for instant use. 
The sound of some one moving in the midst of the 
corn might indicate the presence of an enemy or of 
a friend, and until the anxious boys could deter- 
mine which was near, they remained motionless. 

All at once the silence which had continued for 
moments was broken by whoops nearby, and the 
reports of rifles from within the field. Both boys 
were startled when each looked into the other’s 
face and found his suspicions confirmed. The 
Indians were aware of the presence of the settlers 
in the cornfield and were stealthily entering from 
every side of the field at the same time. Already 
some of the unfortunate settlers had been found 
and their fate had been sealed. The summer 
stillness was broken by the wild whoops which 
indicated the success of some warrior in bringing 
his victim to the ground. There were also calls 
and cries from the wounded, mingled with the fre- 
quent reports of the rifles. 

The standing corn, a few yards in advance of 
the place where Peleg and Israel were lying, now 
suddenly was drawn apart and the boys saw three 
painted Shawnee warriors in single file stealthily 
making their way between the tall stalks. 

They concluded that discovery was not to be 
avoided, and after Peleg had whispered to his com- 
[ 246 ] 


A FIELD OF CORN 

panion to follow his example, one after the other 
the boys raised their rifles and fired upon their 
enemies. 

Aware that one and perhaps two of the approach- 
ing red men had fallen and that the third warrior 
had darted rapidly away at the discharge of the 
guns, both boys sprang to their feet, and, crouching 
low, began to run through the corn. 

Both were too experienced to lose their way 
easily, and not many minutes had elapsed before 
Peleg, without speaking, laid his hand warningly 
on his friend’s shoulder. Instantly both stopped 
and listened. 

Peleg believed that they had arrived near the 
border of the field. He was fearful now that re- 
serves had been stationed so that from whatever 
side the unfortunate settlers might attempt to 
escape they would be met by the bullets of the 
watching warriors. Both boys listened intently 
until several minutes had elapsed. 

“ We had better separate here,” whispered Israel. 
Peleg hesitated a moment and then quietly nodded 
his assent. The possibility of escape, slight as it 
was, would be increased if they proceeded singly 
rather than together. 

“You know the way to the Station?” whispered 
Peleg. Israel nodded his head, and, moving to a 
place twenty feet to his left, turned, and in a course 
[ 247 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

parallel to the one Peleg was following, cautiously 
continued on his way toward the border of the 
field. 

When Peleg came near to the edge of the field 
he stopped once more and peered cautiously all 
about him, listening for sounds that might indicate 
the presence of his enemies. From behind him 
still were heard the shouts and shrieks that were 
mingled with the reports of the guns and the 
whoops of the excited Indians. 

Somehow, in spite of his peril, the beat of the 
young settler’s heart seemed to be almost nor- 
mal. He watched a little field mouse that fearlessly 
peered up at him from the ground. He even 
counted the swings of a spider making her web 
between the swaying branches of an enormous 
stalk of corn. 

Apparently the fighting was confined to the 
farther side of the field. Only infrequent sounds 
of the conflict were heard at his right and left, 
while from the region before him there had been 
almost no sounds of conflict at all. 

Was the border in front of him unguarded? Or 
was it doubly dangerous because the Indians were 
attempting from the other three sides to drive the 
unfortunate men into a trap? 

Stealthily Peleg still crept forward. After each 
step he paused and looked keenly about him as he 
[ 248 ] 


A FIELD OF CORN 

listened for sounds which might indicate renewed 
peril. He had seen nothing of Israel since his 
friend had left him. 

Suddenly he was startled to hear what evidently 
were the sounds of a struggle between two men 
nearby. The laboured breathing and an occa- 
sional exclamation which he heard alike convinced 
him of this. With increasing anxiety Peleg crept 
forward. 

He was not molested when he came to the end 
of the row, but before him he saw a contest which 
threatened to terminate speedily as well as fatally 
for Israel Boone. 

The son of the great scout was in the hands 
of a white man, and was struggling desperately. 
His contestant, however, plainly was much the 
stronger. Peleg saw the face of the man dis- 
tinctly, and he assured himself that never before 
had he looked upon so villainous a countenance. 
The man’s face was distorted and discoloured by 
his efforts, and the perspiration streamed down his 
cheeks leaving furrows behind it. In spite of his 
excitement, Peleg asked himself if the man’s face 
had ever been washed. The necessity for quick 
action, if his friend was to be rescued, caused Peleg 
instantly to raise his rifle to his shoulder and fire. 

Israel’s contestant dropped to the ground as Peleg 
had seen an ox collapse from the blow of an axe. 

[ 249 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Instantly darting to the side of his friend, Peleg 
whispered, “Come!” 

“That is Simon Girty!” gasped Israel, looking 
down into the face of the fallen man before him. 

Startled as Peleg was by the words of his com- 
panion, he did not wait to verify them, but turned 
back at once into the cornfield. As soon as he 
had gone a short distance, bidding Israel follow 
him, he turned to his left, and, still running swiftly 
and silently, the boys advanced a hundred yards; 
they then turned abruptly to their right in the 
direction of the side of the field where they had 
first entered. Although mystified by the action 
of his companion, Israel did not protest as he 
followed Peleg in his flight. 


[ 250 ] 


CHAPTER XXVI 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN 

4 GAIN turning to his left, Peleg, still fol- 

/% lowed by his friend, ran swiftly toward 
.X Sl the border of the cornfield. 

The cries and whoops in a measure had died 
away, and from what he could hear Peleg con- 
cluded that some of his friends had escaped from 
the field and were being pursued in their flight 
toward the fort. 

When Peleg and Israel found they were near 
the road, on the opposite side of which stood the 
forest where the Indians had made their ambus- 
cade, they peered cautiously in all directions, but 
were unable to see any of their enemies. That 
another band of warriors had followed in pursuit 
of the men who had escaped from the first attack 
and from the fight in the cornfield was most 
likely, they concluded. 

Peleg whispered: “The safest place for us is 
where the Indians were hidden. They have gone 
from there and will not come back to look for any 
of us.” 


[ 251 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Israel nodded his head in assent, and, firmly 
grasping their rifles, the boys darted across the 
road and gained the shelter of the trees. When 
the two young scouts were convinced that their 
immediate presence had not been discovered, 
Peleg said to Israel: “Are you sure you can find 
your way if we again separate?” 

“Yes,” answered Israel. “But the Indians are 
between us and the fort. Do you think we can 
ever get through?” 

“We must,” said Peleg. “The folk at Bryant’s 
Station are in such danger that not one of us must 
fail them now.” 

The words hardly had been spoken when there 
was a sharp report of a rifle, and a bullet passed so 
near them that both boys heard it singing on its 
way. 

Moved by a common impulse, they turned and 
dashed into the forest. Whether or no any of 
their enemies were hiding behind the trees toward 
which they were running neither knew. 

They were chiefly intent upon speed now, and 
ran on for several minutes, well knowing that their 
lives depended upon the success of their efforts. 

At last, breathless, both halted for a rest, and 
Peleg said to his companion, “I am sure it will be 
better for us to separate now. You know the way, 
and can look out for yourself. I shall come, too, 
[ 252 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN 


and if we succeed in getting through, it had better 
be before night.” 

“Yes,” assented Israel. “If we wait until dark 
and then creep up to the fort, the guards will be 
likely to fire upon us, mistaking us for Indians.” 

With these words Israel departed. Peleg watched 
his friend as long as he remained within sight, 
and then began with caution to retrace the way 
over which they had come. Keeping a firm grip 
upon Singing Susan, Peleg darted from tree to 
tree and did not venture from each refuge until 
he was convinced that no one was near him. 

His attempt to proceed was interrupted, how- 
ever, by the report of a rifle, and again a bullet 
whistled uncomfortably close to his head, tearing 
some splinters from the tree at his elbow. The 
young scout at his utmost speed darted into the 
wood at his right. 

He was aware that a swift flight could not long 
be maintained because of his recent exertions. 
Where a refuge might be found he did not know. 
But just then he noticed the trunk of what ap- 
peared to be a huge hollow tree leaning over a 
shallow brook, across which he must leap if he 
continued his flight. 

He entered the stream, ran swiftly a few steps 
with the current, and then retraced his way to the 
tree. It was but the work of a moment for him 
[ 253 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

to climb to the broken top, and great was his relief 
when he saw that the tree indeed was hollow. 
Without thought of where he might fall he dropped 
into the welcome opening. 

He fell several feet before the decayed wood 
provided a foothold strong enough to enable him 
to stand. Fortunately the hollow of the tree was 
larger than his body, and although he was cramped 
and almost blinded by the decayed mass, he never- 
theless managed to reach his hunting-knife, and, 
making a small opening through the soft wood, 
peeped out to see if his enemies were within sight. 
As he did so his fears were aroused that the tree 
itself might fall. It was a mere shell and so de- 
cayed that he was surprised that his descent had 
not torn it asunder. 

At that moment a wild cry, plainly from the 
road, came to his ears. Then shouts were fol- 
lowed by the reports of guns and answering whoops 
from the Indians. 

Anxious for his friend Israel, Peleg turned once 
more to ascertain if any of his enemies were near 
his hiding-place. He was hopeful that his trail 
could not be followed farther than the bank of the 
little brook, although he was sufficiently familiar 
with Indian ways to know that the red men, if 
they really were pursuing him, would run in either 
direction along the banks until they found the 
[ 254 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN 

place where he had left the water. He smiled as 
he recalled how he had been standing in the stream 
when he had thrown his arms around the trunk of 
the bending tree. Singing Susan was still held, 
but it would be impossible for him in his cramped 
position to make use of her musical voice. 

Suddenly Peleg was startled to behold an Indian 
step forth from the forest and stand for a moment 
on the bank of the stream almost directly beneath 
him. His surprise increased when he recognized 
the warrior as Henry. He had believed that the 
white Shawnee, as Henry had loved to call him- 
self, had been killed in the attack on Boones- 
borough. His brave deed in extinguishing the 
fire that had been kindled by the burning arrow 
had been followed, as Peleg and others had be- 
lieved, by his death. At least every one had seen 
him fall from the roof and roll to the ground. It 
is true, his body had not been recovered, but there 
were other bodies which had similarly disappeared. 

When his first feeling of astonishment had passed 
and Peleg was convinced that it indeed was 
Henry who was beneath him, a feeling of intense 
anger swept over the young settler. Henry was 
white, and yet had renounced his allegiance to his 
own people and gone back to the Shawnees, and 
with them he was now making war upon his own 
nation ! There was little in his present appearance 
[ 255 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

to distinguish him from other braves of the tribe. 
He wore the scalp-lock and was clad in the Indian 
garb. 

Peleg’s problem in part was solved when at that 
moment the rotten wood gave way beneath him, 
and the tree, unable longer to support the weight 
of the young scout, fell with a crash to the ground. 
As it struck the bank the tree was rent asunder, 
and to the white Shawnee’s astonishment Peleg 
scrambled to his feet from out of the wreckage. 

Before he could brush the dust from his eyes 
and bring Singing Susan to his shoulder Henry 
leaped forward and placed both hands upon the 
barrel of the rifle, saying, “No shoot broder.” 

“You are no brother of mine!” said Peleg. 
“You are a Shawnee and not a white Shawnee, 
either! You are fighting us!” 

“No fight broder,” repeated Henry. “Broder 
show way to fort.” 

For some strange reason which Peleg was un- 
able to explain even to himself, he said abruptly: 
“Lead the way, then! If you can take me safely 
through the line of these savages, I shall never for- 
get you.” 

The young scout was eager to inquire of his 
companion what had befallen him and why he had 
returned to the Shawnees. His present peril, how- 
ever, was so great that he restrained his im- 
[ 256 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN 

pulse, and in silence followed Henry as he led the 
way toward Bryant’s Station. 

Occasionally a halt was made when from some 
nearby place shots were heard indicating that the 
scattered settlers were being pursued either in 
small detachments or individually, for the terrified 
men had scattered when first the ambuscade had 
been discovered. 

When Henry, who apparently was aware of the 
location of the besieging braves, drew near the fort 
he stopped and said: “Now go.” 

Peleg looked about him, and, unable to discover 
any of his enemies nearby, followed the advice which 
had been given him, and, placing his hat on the 
end of the barrel of Singing Susan as a token of 
his peaceful intentions, approached the gate. 

He was at once admitted, and his relief was great 
when the first to greet him was Israel Boone. 

“How many are here?” asked Peleg. 

“I do not know,” answered Israel. “I have 
heard that only six of our men were killed or 
wounded. When we all started toward Lexing- 
ton they might have chased us all the way and 
taken the fort there, because there was nobody left 
to fight for it. ” 

“How many Indians were in that ambuscade?” 
asked Peleg. 

“I hear there were three hundred.” 

[ 257 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


“How did you get to the fort?” 

“I ran straight ahead for an hour,” replied 
Israel with a smile. “How did you come?” 
“Henry got me through the lines.” 

“ Henry ! ” demanded Israel in surprise. “ Henry ! 
I thought he was dead. ” 

“So did I, but he is very much alive. I had no 
time to ask him how he came to be here. I was 
thinking mostly of getting inside the fort. ” 

“It is a comfort to know that at least Girty will 

not lead any more ” 

Israel stopped speaking as a lusty shout was 
heard from a stump that stood near one of the 
bastions, and the two young defenders to their 
amazement beheld Simon Girty himself standing 
erect upon the stump and waving a cloth which at 
some time in its history may have been white. 

In response to this hail every man ran to hear 
what the renegade leader of the Indians had to say. 

They were soon to know the purpose for which 
Girty, on his hands and knees, had crept to the 
place where he now was standing. 

“What do you want?” shouted one of the 
defenders. 

“I have come,” replied Girty in a loud voice, 
“to save your lives. We have more than six 
hundred warriors here, and by to-morrow we shall 
have more. Some of our friends will bring cannon, 
[ 258 ] 


THE WHITE SHAWNEE AGAIN 

and when we have them we can blow every cabin 
in Bryant’s Station into flinders. If we storm 
your fort, as we sure can do when we get our 
cannon, I will not promise that one life will be 
spared. You know the redskins well enough to 
understand how I shall not be able to hold them 
back. If you surrender now, I give you my word 
of honour that not a hair of the head of any one of 
you shall be hurt. I am Simon Girty, and you 
know you can rely upon every word I speak. ” 

A derisive cry from several of the defenders 
greeted this assertion, but when Peleg and Israel 
looked about them they were aware that many of 
the men had been strongly moved by Girty ’s ap- 
peal. 


[ 259 ] 


CHAPTER XXVII 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

B EFORE any conference of the defenders 
could be held, one of the younger men 
leaped to the wall to reply to Girty ’s plea. 
“You know who I am, don’t you?” called Girty. 
“Indeed I do know!” shouted young Reynolds. 
“Everybody south of the Falls of Ohio knows that 
you are Simon Girty. I have a good-for-nothing cur 
dog which I have named Simon Girty, or Simon 
Dirty, he looks so much like you. If you have any 
reinforcements or artillery, bring them up ! But let 
me warn you that if you or any of those naked rascals 
with you ever get into this fort we shall not use our 
guns upon them. We have no powder to waste on 
such wretches. We have cut some big bunches 
of birch switches and have scattered them all 
through the fort; and that is just what we cut them 
for — to thrash you and your rascally comrades. 
And let me tell you,” he continued, “that you are 
not the only ones who are expecting reinforcements ! 
We have received word that the whole country is 
aroused and marching to help us, Simon Girty!” 
[ 260 ] 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

he shouted. “If you and your gang of murderers 
stay twenty-four hours longer before the fort you 
will never be able to leave. Your scalps will be 
drying in the sun on the roofs of our cabins. ” 

A loud laugh from his friends greeted the words 
of the young backwoods orator, and it was plain 
that the spirit which young Reynolds had dis- 
played had aroused the drooping courage of his 
companions. Many of the men were aware that 
on more than one occasion the Indians had indeed 
brought cannon with them, and by their aid had 
succeeded in destroying two of the stations. 

All became silent when Simon Girty once more 
stood up to reply. “It is too bad,” began the 
renegade, “it’s a pity that such people should be 
tomahawked and scalped ! I can protect you now, 
if you will surrender, but I give you fair warning if 
you do not I shall not be able to hold back my 
warriors.” 

A derisive shout greeted this declaration, and in 
apparent sorrow Simon Girty at once withdrew. 

It was not known within the fort that he in- 
stantly ordered preparations to be made for raising 
the siege. Throughout the night not a sound 
was heard, and when daylight came the Indian 
camp was deserted! 

When Peleg and Israel sought the place where 
the warriors had encamped they found the fires 
[ 261 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

still burning brightly and even pieces of meat left 
on the roasting-sticks. 

“You see!” said Israel gleefully. “They left 
just a little while before daylight. ” 

“Yes,” said Peleg, “that is when they usually 
roast their meat. I wonder if they are all really 
gone?” 

The rejoicing at Bryant’s Station was great 
when it was known that the Indians had departed. 
Before noon the fighting force of white men was 
increased to one hundred and sixty-seven. Among 
those who entered came Daniel Boone, or Colonel 
Boone as some now called him, since he had re- 
ceived his commission from Colonel Clark. 

“What does this mean?” demanded Israel when 
he saw his younger brother Daniel among the men 
in the assembly, “What are you doing here? ” 

“I think I have as good a right to come as you, ” 
retorted Boone’s younger son. “I am almost sev- 
enteen. ” 

“And old enough to know better,” laughed 
Peleg, who was fond of the boy and many a time 
had taken him with him on his expeditions into the 
forest. 

The officers, who had hastened to the place as 
soon as reports of its peril had been brought, now 
assembled, and at once called the men of Bryant’s 
Station to a conference. 

[ 262 ] 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

“It is known,” explained Colonel Todd, “that 
Colonel Logan has collected a strong force in 
Lincoln and that it will be here within twenty-four 
hours. If we wait for his coming we shall be 
that much stronger when we start in pursuit of 
Girty and his savages. What do you think?” he 
asked, addressing Boone, who stood leaning upon 
his rifle in the rear of the essembly. 

“It will be wise to wait,” replied Boone quietly. 
“I have never found it to be a mistake to get 
ready before you attempt to do anything. Girty, 
according to his story, has treble our numbers. 
The trail which the Shawnees have left behind is so 
plain and so broad that I am suspicious that they 
have made signs which they hope will lead us to 
pursue them. My advice is to wait until Colonel 
Logan shall come with his men.” 

The younger members of the force, however, were 
unwilling to delay. To them appearances were con- 
vincing that the Indians had fled because they were 
alarmed. Now was the time, they declared, when 
the savages ought to be chased and taught a lesson ! 
If there should be a delay even of a day in follow- 
ing them, the Indians would gain such an advance 
that they could not be overtaken and punished for 
their evil deeds. 

The fiery zeal of the young men was not to be 
denied. Against the counsel of Boone and others 
[ 263 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

of the older scouts, who had long experience in 
dealing with their Indian enemies, a swift pursuit 
instantly was begun. Many of the men were 
mounted on horses, but the entire mass, horse and 
foot, kept well together. 

The eager party had not gone far from Bryant’s 
Station before a halt was called, when it was dis- 
covered that the retiring Indians had turned into 
the buffalo road and, almost as if they were at- 
tempting to make their trail still more evident, it 
was noticed that they had chopped many of the 
trees on either side with their hatchets. 

Boone shook his head when he discovered these 
indications of apparent carelessness in the band 
they were following. 

“My opinion is,” he said soberly to Colonel 
Todd, “that Girty is trying to lead us on. Just as 
our men ran into their trap on the way to Bryant ’s 
Station, I am afraid now that they will be led into 
another. ” 

“ But it is too late to go back, ” said Colonel Todd. 

“Yes, I am afraid our men will not go back now\ 
My only word of advice to you is to go ahead cau- 
tiously. ” 

“Will you be one of the advance guard?” 

“If you so desire.” 

“At least you are not afraid, and you will not see 
what is not there.” 

[ 264 ] 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

“I shall do my best,” said Boone quietly. 

As Peleg, who was standing nearby and had 
heard the conversation, looked into the face of his 
friend he became aware that the years of anxiety 
had left their mark upon his rugged countenance. 
There was, however, a deeper expression of gentle- 
ness on the face of the great scout which in no way 
detracted from the impression of strength which 
his entire body still produced. 

Orders were soon given to camp for the night 
in the forest, and on the following day the little 
army arrived at the Lower Blue Licks. Just as 
the force, proceeding without any form of order, 
arrived at the southern bank of the Licking, some 
of the men saw several Indians climbing the rocky 
ridge on the opposite side. The red men halted 
when the Kentuckians appeared, looked at them 
intently a few minutes in silence, and then, as 
calmly and leisurely as if no enemies were near, 
disappeared over the top of the hill. 

A halt of the white men was made at once, and 
several of the officers held a consultation. 

Apparently there were differences of opinion 
among the leaders, for after a few minutes had 
elapsed Colonel Todd summoned Daniel Boone 
and inquired his opinion as to what had best be 
done. All the officers were now very serious. 

The great scout, leaning upon his rifle, spoke in 
[ 265 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the deep, quiet tones he usually used: “My opin- 
ion is that our situation is critical and difficult. 
The force before us without question is ready for 
battle and outnumbers us largely.” 

“Why do you think that?” inquired Colonel 
Todd. 

“Because of the easy and slow retreat of the 
Indians who just went over the crest of yonder 
hill. I am familiar with all this region and I am 
fearful they are trying to draw us on. About a 
mile ahead of us there are two ravines, one on 
either side of the ridge. There the Indians can hide 
and attack us at the same time, both in front and 
on our flanks, almost before we could know they 
were there.” 

“What do you think is the best thing to do, 
then?” inquired Colonel Todd seriously. 

“My advice,” said Boone, “is to do one of two 
things: Either wait for the coming of Colonel 
Logan, who without doubt is on his way to join us; 
or, if it is decided to attack the Indians without 
waiting for him to come up, then my advice is that 
half our force ought to go up the river, cross the 
rapids, and fall upon the Indians from that side at 
the same time the others attack them from the 
front.” 

“I am afraid that cannot be done,” said Colonel 
Todd, shaking his head. 

[ 266 ] 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

“Whatever is done,” said Boone quietly, “my 
advice to you is to go over the ground carefully 
before the men cross the river here. Send some 
scouts ahead. I have never found, Colonel Todd, 
that any man lost by being prepared for what 
might befall him.” 

Every man in the little assembly was listening 
with deep attention to the great scout who was a 
man of silence unless his advice was sought. 

When he ceased some urged the adoption of his 
recommendation to wait for the coming of Colonel 
Logan and his men. There were others, how- 
ever, who were strongly in favour of advancing 
at once. 

In the midst of the warm discussion Major Mc- 
Gary, one of the young officers who was unable 
to endure the thought of being near an enemy and 
not fighting, let out a wild whoop. At the same 
moment he waved his hand over his head, spurred 
his horse into the river and then shouted in his 
loudest tone, “Let all who are not cowards follow 
me!” 

Instantly the mounted men dashed into the 
river, every one apparently striving to be the first 
to gain the opposite shore. The men on foot also 
rushed into the stream, which for a time seemed to 
be a rolling mass of men and water. No order had 
been given and no order now was desired. Through 
[ 267 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the deep river horses and men staggered forward, 
with McGary still leading the way. 

They gained the opposite shore where the un- 
protected nature of the ground seemed to forbid 
their advance. Trampled by the buffalo, every 
bush and low tree had been stripped bare. Mul- 
titudes of rocks blackened by the sunlight were to 
be seen on every side. No scouts were sent in ad- 
vance and none acted on the flanks. The contagi- 
ous example of Major McGary acted like magic, 
and men and horses went forward as if every 
one was doing his utmost to outstrip his neigh- 
bour. 

Along with the others went Daniel Boone, his 
two boys, and Peleg. The expression of Boone’s 
face had not changed since his sober advice had 
been disregarded by his impulsive comrades. But 
he was not one to draw back when his friends were 
rushing into action. 

Suddenly the men in front halted. They had 
arrived at the place mentioned by the scout, 
where the two ravines met. A small body of 
Indians appeared for a moment and fired at the ap- 
proaching settlers. 

Instantly McGary and the men with him re- 
turned the fire, although they were at a great dis- 
advantage because they were standing upon a bare 
and open ridge, while their enemies were in a ra- 
[ 268 ] 


THE STRUGGLE IN THE RAVINE 

vine in which the bushes partly concealed the 
warriors. 

As the reports of the guns were heard, the men 
in the rear rushed forward to assist their friends. 
But before they were able to gain the ridge they 
were stopped by a terrible fire from the ravine which 
was on their flank. They halted, and it was almost 
as if they had been shut in by the jaws of some 
enormous beast. There was no cover, and a terrible 
fire was being poured into them from front and 
side, while their enemies still were hidden from 
sight. 

Gradually, however, the Indians pushed out 
from the ravine as the fire became fiercer. Indeed 
they were striving to extend their lines and turn 
the right of the Kentuckians so that their retreat 
would be cut off. 

As soon as this was made clear by the increase 
of the firing from that quarter, the men in the rear 
attempted to fall back, and then by breaking 
through the attacking party, gain their only way 
of escape — to the river. 

Their actions, in part misunderstood by their 
companions, created what was almost a panic. 
From the ravine to the river the sight was inde- 
scribable. Above the reports of the guns rose the 
shrieks and cries of the wounded and the wild and 
merciless whoops of the Indians. 

[ 269 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Many of the mounted men escaped, but those 
who were fighting on foot were in deadly peril. 
Daniel Boone, in the thick of the fight, saw his 
boy, Israel, fall lifeless before the guns of the 
Indians. Even the death of his son, however, did 
not prevent the great scout from becoming aware 
that he himself was almost entirely surrounded by 
the frantic, howling, whooping mob of warriors. 


[ 270 ] 


CHAPTER XXVIII 

AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

I T WAS in such crises that the great scout 
best displayed the qualities which had 
made him a marked man among the pio- 
neers. It had been impossible for him to rescue the 
body of his fallen son. Around him on every side 
were heard shouts and cries and the continual 
report of the rifles. 

Whatever occurred, Daniel Boone was never 
long at a loss how to act. Controlling his feelings, 
he turned to the men who were near him and said 
quietly, “Come with me!” 

As the men obediently followed, the scout, who 
was familiar with the entire region, instead of 
running toward the ford as most of the fugitives 
now were doing, dashed into the ravine where 
many of the Indians previously had been con- 
cealed. Apparently they had now left to join in 
the wild pursuit of the demoralized settlers. 

Boone and his comrades were not to escape, 
however, without attracting the attention of some 
of the howling Indians. A half dozen or more 
[ 271 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

discovered the fleeing settlers and with wild whoops 
started in swift pursuit. 

It was here that Boone’s knowledge of the re- 
gion, as well as his coolness, came to his aid. Lead- 
ing the way to a place in the ravine where there was 
a narrow passage between the rocks, he ordered 
his companions to precede him, while he himself 
raised his rifle with deliberation and fired at the 
approaching Indians. 

The entire band halted, for their own rifles 
were not loaded at the time and they were depend- 
ing upon a similar condition among the whites. 
The red men were now relying on their toma- 
hawks. 

As soon as the band halted, Boone waited a 
moment to assure himself that his companions 
were safe, and then, running swiftly, rejoined them. 
When the fleeing men came to the end of the 
ravine, once more they found a small band of their 
foes awaiting them, and with wild cries they 
started toward them. But the great scout, in spite 
of the need of haste, had bidden his companions to 
reload in preparation for this very emergency. After 
receiving the fire from their guns, the Indians 
dropped back, while the white men, quickly making 
use of the advantage thus afforded, were able to 
escape to the woods beyond. 

“We shall now be able to make our way to Bry- 
[ 272 ] 


AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

ant’s Station,” said Boone. “ There will be no 
Indians to interfere with us from this time on.” 

His words proved to be correct, and by the middle 
of the afternoon the half-dozen men with the great 
scout arrived safely at the fort. 

Throughout the remainder of the day many of 
the men who had so confidently gone forth in the 
morning came straggling back to the fort. 

Peleg, who had been among those who rushed 
to the ford, returned to Bryant’s Station when it 
was nearly dusk. He had secured the aid of two 
others, and the three were carrying young Daniel 
Boone, who also had been shot in the fight at the 
Licks. 

It was soon discovered that Boone’s younger 
son was not seriously wounded. When the wel- 
come information was received the face of the 
great scout remained unchanged in its expression, 
though the deathly pallor, that for a moment had 
spread over it when he had been informed of what 
had befallen his boy, disappeared. 

“’Tis a wonder,” said Peleg, “that any of us 
are left alive to tell the story. Some of us ran up 
the stream and swam across. Young Dan was 
as brave as any man in the crowd. Even after he 
had been shot in the shoulder he did not give up, 
but he swam across the stream, keeping up with 
the rest of us. The men who could not swim were 
[ 273 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

the ones that were shot down or were made prison- 
ers without being able to do anything to defend 
themselves.” 

“Were any shot after you had crossed the 
river?” inquired Boone. 

“I do not know of any,” replied Peleg. “But 
from the ravine clear down to the ford the loss was 
heavy. One of the bravest deeds I ever saw in my 
life was that of young Aaron Reynolds — he is the 
one who made us laugh when Simon Girty mounted 
the stump and gave us his speech. Reynolds was 
on horseback, and about halfway between the 
battle ground and the ford he found Captain 
Patterson completely worn out. The captain 
had dropped in his tracks, he was so exhausted, 
for you see he had been wounded three or four 
times in the fights we had with the Indians two or 
three years ago.” 

“I remember that he was,” said Boone. 

“The Indians were almost ready to close up on 
the captain, but just at that moment Reynolds 
saw what was going on. He jumped from his 
saddle, helped Captain Patterson to mount, and 
then turned and ran on foot as fast as he could go. 
He ran like a deer after he was out of the main 
road, then jumped into the river right where you 
said you crossed, and swam to the other side. 
There he had some serious trouble, though. He 
[ 274 ] 


AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

was wearing a pair of buckskin breeches and they 
became so heavy and full of water when he was in 
the river that he could not run very fast when he 
struck the shore. When he sat down and tried 
to get rid of a part of the water some of the Indians 
rushed up and before he knew it he was their 
prisoner.” 

“Did you say he is here now? ” inquired Boone. 

“Yes, sir. I was afraid the Indians would 
tomahawk him, but they kept to their regular 
plan of not putting any of their prisoners to death 
until they get back to their own country, so Rey- 
nolds wasn’t troubled very much at the time. 
They left him in charge of three of the braves while 
the others started for some more of our men who 
were nearby. The three Indians were so excited 
when they saw our men that two of them left 
Reynolds in charge of the third while they ran to 
join in the chase with the others. Then the Indian 
that had Reynolds in his charge started for the 
woods.” 

“Were they both armed?” asked Boone. 

“Reynolds had had his rifle taken away from 
him, but the Indian had a tomahawk and a rifle 
in his hands. After they had gone a little way the 
Indian stooped to tie the string of his moccasin 
and Aaron instantly jumped upon him, knocked 
him down with his fist and then ran for the woods. 

[ 275 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Captain Patterson has just come in and he says 
he is going to give Aaron two hundred acres of the 
best land he owns.” 

Such of the bodies as had been recovered were 
now being brought to the fort, and the fact that 
many of the men of Bryant’s Station had been 
made prisoners by the attacking Indians increased 
the feeling of gloom that settled upon the place. 
Among the men who had fallen was Colonel Todd, 
who had sought the advice of the great scout and 
then did not follow it. 

Long before nightfall Colonel Logan and his 
men arrived at Bryant’s Station. In his force 
were no less than four hundred and fifty men. 
Upon their arrival they learned from the men who 
had succeeded in returning to the fort of the fate 
which had befallen the band which Colonel Todd 
had led against the Indians. 

Waiting to hear no more, greatly alarmed for 
his friends and suspecting that only a part of the 
disaster had been reported, Colonel Logan at once 
led his men over the way by which the defenders 
of the fort had gone in their untimely pursuit of 
their wily foe. 

With Colonel Logan went Daniel Boone and 
Peleg, as well as many others of the defenders. 
The great scout showed plainly the suffering 
through which he was passing. Two of his boys 
[ 276 ] 



Silently the men crossed the ford 























































AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

had been shot by the relentless Shawnees and his 
third son had received a severe wound. Appar- 
ently Boone did not believe that his sufferings were 
to be relieved by anything his friends could do to 
aid him. He had seldom spoken since the men 
had departed from the Station, but Peleg was 
confident that he understood the purpose which 
was urging the gentle-hearted hunter forward. 

The second day the advancing soldiers came near 
to the place where the fight had occurred. Long 
before they had arrived, however, Peleg had shud- 
dered when he discovered flocks of circling buz- 
zards that were hovering over the battle ground. 
He glanced into the face of his companion when the 
discovery had been made, and knew that the scout 
also understood the meaning of their presence. 

When the advancing band approached the bank 
of the river they discovered many of the bodies 
still floating near the shore. They were the un- 
fortunate victims that had been shot by the In- 
dians after they had rushed into the stream. 

A silence, indescribable, intense, awful, settled 
over all the men. There were tears in the eyes of 
some of the hardiest of the settlers at the fearful 
sight upon which they looked. No man was able 
to recognize among the putrid bodies the face of 
his lost friend. 

Silently the men crossed the ford and advanced 
[277] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

toward the ravine. In the scene of the recent 
fight the sight was even more heartbreaking. Here, 
too, the bodies of the many who had fallen could no 
longer be distinguished one from another. 

Daniel Boone, unmindful of the presence of his 
comrades, had been searching quietly among the 
bodies for that of his missing boy. Even the men 
who were most eager in their search for their 
friends stopped a moment as they watched the 
man in his agonizing and fruitless quest. 

The great scout soon turned to Colonel Logan 
and said: “ ? Tis no use, Colonel. We must give 
the poor fellows decent burial here and now.” 

The men at once carried out the bidding which 
their leader gave. Silently the settlers, for the 
moment all thoughts of vengeance gone from their 
minds, dug trenches wherever the soil permitted, 
and in these the bodies of their dead and muti- 
lated friends were buried. 

There were many faces in the band down which 
the tears were rolling while this task was being 
accomplished. The manner of the great scout, 
however, was unchanged. Only the deepening of 
the lines in his face and his unusual pallor gave 
indications of the strain through which he was 
passing. His manner still was silent and self- 
controlled, as in the days when the joyous things 
of life had more often been his portion. 

[ 278 ] 


AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

When the gruesome task at last was finished, it 
was Daniel Boone himself who said to Colonel 
Logan in reply to the latter’s inquiries: “It is 
useless now to try to follow the Shawnees.” 

“Why do you say that?” inquired the colonel. 

“Because by this time they are far beyond our 
reach. They have lost no time, you may be sure.” 

“How many captives do you think they have 
taken with them?” 

“Not many,” said Boone. 

“But there are some sixty-seven of our men miss- 
ing.” 

“Yes,” assented Boone, “but we have accounted 
for nearly sixty this day.” 

“I am told,” suggested the colonel, “that they 
will put every prisoner to death, or so many of 
them as may be required to make good any loss 
they themselves have had.” 

The great scout shook his head as he replied: 
“The Indians have not lost as many as we.” 

“Why do you say that?” 

“Because the advantage was all with them. 
They greatly outnumbered us, and in a good part 
of the fight they were sheltered by the rocks while 
our men were fighting in the open. It was the 
bloodiest fight I was ever in.” 

“And to you one of the saddest,” suggested the 
colonel. 


[ 279 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


Boone nodded his head but did not speak. 

“I cannot understand,” continued the colonel, 
■‘why it is that you take your own troubles so 
quietly. You certainly have suffered more than 
most men on the border, and yet I fancy the man 
has yet to be born who has heard you complain.” 

“And why should I complain?” inquired Boone, 
smiling as he looked into the face of his friend. “It 
does not make my own griefs less to try to have 
another share them. That is something no one 
can do. My heart, at least, must bear its own bur- 
den. If any one thinks that his troubles are less J 
than those that come to his friends, he is probably 
mistaken. My experience has led me to believe | 
that almost every one has about all he can bear. 
There are only two classes of people, at least as j 
far as I have observed — and I am well aware how | 
little I know in this particular — but as I said — j 
there are only two classes of people that cry and i 
laugh easily.” 

“Who are they?” 

“Children and savages. Neither class has 
learned to control itself. A strong man shows his 
strength, at least in my humble judgment,” Boone 
added modestly, “by being able to refrain from 
useless words, and bynot whining over his troubles.” 

“I think you are correct,” said Colonel Logan 
musingly. “Now, then,” he continued after a 
[ 280 ] 


AT THE LOWER BLUE LICKS 

moment, “is it your judgment that the best thing 
for us to do is to return to Bryant’s Station?” 

“ It is.” 

“Then if it is a good thing to do it will be well 
for us to do it quickly. I shall see that the order is 
given. We have some stirring days before us be- 
cause I am sure it will never do to let the Shawnees 
believe for any length of time that they have been 
able to defeat the white men. ” 


[ 281 ] 


CHAPTER XXIX 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

T HE judgment of Daniel Boone was accepted 
by all the men in the band. Indeed 
there were many now who were blaming 
others as well as themselves for not having listened 
to the word of the wise old scout before they had 
entered into the unequal struggle with the Indians 
at Blue Licks. 

Swiftly and seriously the men retraced their way 
to Bryant’s Station, where they were dismissed by 
Colonel Logan with the understanding that they 
would respond if he should call for their help in 
the near future. This he fully expected to do. 

In a rude wagon Daniel Boone and Peleg carried 
the wounded boy back to his home. The wound 
itself was not believed to be serious, although 
naturally after the tragedies which had occurred in 
his family Daniel Boone was anxious for his son. 
Daniel Morgan Boone, or “young Dan,” as he 
sometimes was called by the settlers, to distin- 
guish him from his father, made light of his ex- 
periences and even declared that he was prepared 
[ 282 ] 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

to ride his horse back to Boonesborough instead of 
being carried in the jolting wagon. His protest, 
however, was not heeded, and in a short time the 
Boonesborough men were back in their settlement. 

To all it now was evident that Daniel Boone 
held a place in the regard of the settlers such as he 
never before had won. His deep sorrow over the 
distressing tragedies which had resulted in the 
loss of two promising sons, and his willingness to 
do all in his power to aid his friends : these qualities 
won him sympathy and affection in addition to the 
respect in which he was held because of his excellent 
judgment. The simple manner of the great scout, 
his skill as a hunter, his knowledge of the Indians, 
and his enduring friendship, were more highly ap- 
preciated with every passing day. 

Shortly after the return of Boone and his com- 
panions, the scout said to Peleg, “ I have just re- 
ceived word from Colonel George Rogers Clark 
from the Falls of the Ohio.” 

“What does he want?” asked Peleg quickly. 
The sturdy colonel in control of the forces of the 
entire region was known to be a man of action, and 
one whose activities were familiar to all the settlers. 

“He sends me word,” said Boone quietly, “that 
he plans to raise a force of one thousand men to go 
against the Indian towns. ” 

“Why does he do that? ” 

[ 283 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“ He has two reasons : One is that the people are 
so discouraged and disappointed by the recent 
successes of the Indians that many are thinking of 
withdrawing from Kentucky. The other reason 
is that he thinks the Indians ought not to be per- 
mitted to rest upon the victories which they have 
won, and that the battle of Blue Licks and the 
fight at Bryant’s Station must be avenged, or the 
Shawnees and the Wyandottes will soon be more 
active than they have been. ” 

“ What do you think? ” inquired Peleg. 

“It is not for me to say, ” replied Boone, his rare 
smile lighting his face for a moment as he spoke. 

“But you think what you do not say,” per- 
sisted Peleg. 

“I think Colonel Clark is doing the only thing 
which will bring help to our stations. Either the 
Indians or we are to live in this country. It is a 
pity that we cannot say, the Indians and we; but 
from the feeling they have shown, and the way in 
which I know many of the whites look upon them, 
I am afraid such a plan will be impossible. There 
is then only one thing for us to do. ” 

“What is that?” 

“It must be decided once for all whether the 
country is to be occupied by the white men or by 
the red. There can be but one answer. How- 
ever,” continued Boone, “I have little time to 
[ 284 ] 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

discuss these matters with you, now. It is a time 
for action, and much as you and I may dislike to 
leave our homes, we cannot lightly regard such a 
summons as Colonel Clark has sent us.” 

“What is the plan?” 

“He proposes to raise an army of one thousand 
men, as I said, and march to destroy the Indian 
villages.” 

“Where do we meet?” 

“At the Falls of the Ohio. I have seen Colonel 
Logan, and he is to assemble his men and march in 
one body to the meeting-place. My own judgment 
is that it would be better for the force to split up 
into smaller parties, but that is not for me to say. 
I have, however, arranged with Colonel Logan for 
you and six other men to go as a band of scouts to 
the north of the route we are to take, and at the 
same time have several bands move to the south. 
I do not believe there will be any danger before we 
arrive at the meeting-place, but it is well to pro- 
vide for what may happen before it comes to pass. 
As you know, that has always been my plan. I do 
not think I ever had a fight with an Indian that I 
did not try to think what he would do, or what I 
would do if I were in his place, before the real 
contest began.” 

“Are you to lead the scouts on the south? ” 

“That is for the King to say,” replied Boone, 
[ 285 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


smiling as he quoted the well-known saying of 
Sam Oliver. 

The following morning Peleg, as leader of his 
little band of scouts, departed for the place of 
assembly. The advance to the Falls of the Ohio 
would require three days or more. It was not be- 
lieved that there would be anything more than 
occasional attacks on the main body by small 
bands of Indians, for few braves would dare to 
oppose the coming of this great army. 

In Peleg’ s little band was Sam Oliver, the 
hunter. Sam now was plainly showing the effects 
of the passing years. He was suffering from rheu- 
matism acquired by exposure in the many winters 
during which he had been known throughout the 
settlements as a great hunter. His visits to the 
stations were more frequent than formerly, and he 
remained longer than in the preceding years. He 
was still sensitive, however, concerning his physi- 
cal strength and skill, and refused to listen to any 
suggestion that he was not in condition to accom- 
pany the younger men on their way to the meeting- 
place of the army. 

“Peleg,” said Sam Oliver, when the party, all 
mounted, had set forth on their expedition, “I 
know a little Indian town about seventy -five miles 
from here where we can get some horses.” 

“Is it on our way?” 


[ 286 ] 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

“It is not far from the river. If we can get a 
dozen or more horses it will make the heart of 
Colonel Clark rejoice.” 

In explanation of the hunter’s words, it may be 
said that stealing horses from the Indians was not 
looked upon as any crime by the early pioneers. 
Such a conviction may have been due in part to 
the fact that the tribes and white settlers were 
usually in a state of war with one another. The 
Indians’ intense distrust of the early settlers had, 
as we know, long ago deepened into enduring 
hatred. 

There were few who believed the Indians were 
governed by any other than treacherous, blood- 
thirsty motives. So intense had become this belief 
along the border that it was well-nigh impossible 
for the men of that time to look upon the simple 
questions of right and wrong in any way that 
might favour the red men or even do them simple 
justice. To them they simply were enemies that 
must be driven from the region or exterminated. 

Late in the following afternoon Sam Oliver, 
when his friends halted, donned his Indian garb. 
In his disguise he was scarcely to be distinguished 
from one of the warriors. 

“I have learned the lingo, too,” he said laugh- 
ingly. “A good many times I have gone right 
into their villages and no one has suspected that 
[ 287 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


I was a white man. I want to get about fifteen 
horses,” continued Sam, “and I want almost as 
much to get one of the Indians alive.” 

“What for?” demanded Peleg in surprise. 

It was seldom that prisoners were made of the 
warriors at that time, because whenever a fight 
occurred it was usually a struggle to the death. 
The Indians, however, occasionally, as we know 
from the experiences of the great scout himself, 
not only made captives of their prisoners, but at 
times adopted them into their tribes in place of 
young braves that had been killed in battle. 

“I want one for a pet,” laughed Sam Oliver. 

“I would sooner have a rattlesnake,” declared 
one of the party. 

“That is what I used to say,” said Sam, “but 
then that was years ago when I was young and 
slender. I know more about them now, and if I 
can get one alive I am going to make a pet of him.” 

“You will be making a mistake,” declared 
Schoolmaster Hargrave, who also was one of Pel- 
eg’s band. It had been long since he had wielded 
the ferrule or had taught the boys and girls in 
Boonesborough. In recent years he had been 
toiling in the fields, as had the great scout and 
Peleg. He was, however, scarcely more success- 
ful in raising tobacco than he had been in training 
the children in his school. The title of “School- 
[ 288 ] 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

master” still clung to him, and when Sam Oliver 
laughed loudly and turned to answer his protest, 
he said, “Well, Schoolmaster, I can understand 
how you do not like the Indians. You had some 
pretty wild experiences yourself, in the school- 
house. I understand that two or three of the 
boys disguised themselves the way I have and put 
you out through the window. Is that true?” 

Whether the statement was true or not it was 
never explained, for the hunter suddenly warned 
his companions to become silent as they were 
approaching the village he was seeking. 

Advancing with three of his companions and 
leaving Peleg and the remainder of the party be- 
hind to await their return, Sam stealthily began 
to make his way toward the little Indian village 
which he said was located only a few yards distant 
from the spot where a halt had been made. 

Sam was absent only two hours. His approach 
was heard by his waiting companions long before 
the hunter could be seen. It was plain, too, that 
he had been successful. The noise of snapping 
branches and an occasional whinny indicated that 
Sam was not returning empty-handed. 

“Did I not tell you what I would do?” boasted 
the hunter, when he returned. “I said I wanted 
a dozen horses. I have six, so that I am only half 
as happy as I ought to be.” 

[ 289 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

“You are happier now than you soon will be,” 
retorted Peleg, “unless we leave this part of the 
country* right away.” 

The horses which had been secured were all 
young and only partly broken. It was impossi- 
ble for the party to mount them, and there were 
times when it was difficult even to lead them by 
the leathern straps which were fastened about 
their necks. 

Sam acknowledged the seriousness of the sit- 
uation, and no urging was required to make the 
men push forward rapidly. 

When night fell they selected for their camp a 
spot on the bend of a little stream. Two of the 
men were assigned positions in the rear of the 
camp to watch for any pursuing Indians. There 
was no fear of an attack from the opposite side of 
the stream. 

At midnight the guard was relieved, and as it was 
Peleg’s turn to take the position, he said quietly, 
“I can do this alone. All the rest of you turn in 
and get your sleep.” 

His directions were speedily followed. The 
night passed without alarm, and the young scout 
was beginning to think that either the war- 
riors of the village were aware of the plan of 
Colonel Clark, and had departed to join their 
own bands, or that they were absent from the 
[ 290 ] 


TO THE MEETING-PLACE 

village at the time, and had not yet learned of 
Sam’s theft. 

The first faint streaks of the dawn had appeared, 
and Peleg, taking a little bucket, stepped to the 
brook to secure some running water. The fire 
which had been kept alive throughout the night 
was burning low. When Peleg returned to the 
camp he was startled when he discovered by the 
dim light that the water in his bucket was muddy. 
There could be but one explanation, and the young 
scout hastily aroused his companions. 

44 The brook was not muddy last night, but it is 
now,” said the young leader. 44 To my mind that 
shows that we are being followed, and the Indians 
are coming down the stream to creep close to us.” 

Just then the schoolmaster was seized with sharp 
pains and began to groan and writhe in his suffering. 
No one understood the nature of the attack, and 
the simple remedies which were used apparently 
produced no relief. At last the suffering man was 
covered with a blanket and placed near the 
ashes of the fire. All the men except Peleg then 
lay down once more upon the ground. A strenu- 
ous day was awaiting them, and whether Master 
Hargrave was ill or not, they must get their 
necessary rest. They were inclined to believe, too, 
after their long wait, that no Indians were near 
them. The stream might have been muddied by 
[ 291 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

any one of half a dozen other means. Probably a 
’coon had been the guilty party. 

And yet all unknown to the little body of settlers 
a band of twelve warriors had been furtively ap- 
proaching them in the very manner Peleg had sus- 
pected. Their noiseless footsteps had even brought 
them within a few yards of the camp. Only the 
coming of the morning was required to enable 
them to attack. 


CHAPTER XXX 


CONCLUSION 

T HE light of the rising sun had appeared 
when the crouching Indians together fired 
upon the silent little camp. 

By some strange chance almost all the bullets 
took effect in the body of the suffering schoolmaster. 
There was not even a cry from the stricken man, and 
as the Indians sent forth a wild whoop every one in 
the camp leaped to his feet and fled from the spot. 

There had been no time for plans to be made, and 
consequently every man fled by himself. They 
were followed by the shots and the cries of the 
pursuing Indians, but no one knew what had be- 
fallen his comrade. 

Peleg, who was fully dressed and better equipped 
than his friends for flight, with Singing Susan in 
his hand, suddenly fell as he ran along the border 
of a swamp which he had not noticed before. 

The warriors swept past him, all believing that 
the young scout had been shot, and that his scalp 
might be secured when they returned. 

Waiting only until the howling band had passed 
[ 293 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

him, Peleg made his escape. He sped swiftly back in 
the direction of the camp, hoping to secure one of 
the stolen horses. When he arrived, however, his 
disappointment was keen when he found that not 
one of the horses was still there. 

Exerting himself to the utmost, and still gripping 
Singing Susan, Peleg ran swiftly into the forest in 
the direction of the meeting-place which Colonel 
Clark had selected. 

Several hours elapsed before the young scout 
arrived at the rendezvous. Before night fell three 
of his recent companions also appeared, but Sam 
Oliver was not of their number, and in fact he was 
never heard of again. 

Daniel Boone was now present, and when he and 
Peleg were together as darkness fell over the camp 
Boone said: “I am more hopeful now that we 
shall soon have peace than I have ever been before. ” 

“Just now,” suggested Peleg with a laugh, “I 
am thinking more of something good to eat than I 
am of getting into the Indian villages. ” 

“That suggests the one mistake which I fear 
has been made. In his eagerness, the colonel has 
assembled his men before he has secured supplies. 
The result is that almost every man is hungry to- 
night. ” 

“I think I can endure it if the rest of the men 
do not complain,” said Peleg sturdily. “I have 
[ 294 ] 


CONCLUSION 


not been with you through all these years without 
learning that I must not cry if everything I want 
does not come to me just when I want it. ” 

“That is well. I do not think we will remain 
here long. It may be that we shall start within a 
few hours. All the men are eager to be gone, and 
there is nothing to be gained by delay. Without 
sufficient supplies for our horses as well as our 
men, the sooner we start the better it will be for us 
all. ” 

“ Are all here who are expected? ” inquired Peleg. 

“There are about one thousand here now, in- 
cluding the regulars. ” 

This conversation was interrupted by the an- 
nouncement that they would depart at once. 
There was a sufficient number of horses in the camp 
to provide one for Peleg and for others who had 
come on foot. 

Just previous to the start the great scout ex- 
plained to Peleg, “We are not far from one of the 
largest villages of the Indians. It may be that we 
shall come to it before morning. That will depend 
upon the pace at which our men advance. ” 

The morning dawned, and still no sign of the first 
of the Indian villages had been seen. Not a trace 
of a warrior had been discovered throughout the 
night, nor had any been seen when several hours of 
the new day had passed. Whether or not the 
[29 5 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

Indians had been informed of the approach of their 
enemies was not known. 

Steadily the hungry men pressed forward, their 
conviction that the time had arrived for them to 
obtain lasting relief from the attacks of the treach- 
erous Shawnees being even stronger than their feel- 
ing of hunger. 

Peleg and the great scout were in the front lines, 
if indeed the advancing body could be said to 
be moving with any appearance of order. It is 
true the men kept closely together, but the nature 
of the ground over which they were moving and 
the forests through which they passed made any ap- 
proach to military order well-nigh impossible. 

The men near Peleg abruptly halted when not 
far before them on the opposite shore of a large 
pond they spied a solitary Indian. The warrior 
was standing as motionless as the nearby trees as 
he gazed steadily at his approaching enemies. 

Suddenly he turned and fled into the forest, dis- 
regarding the calls of the men and even unmindful 
of the few scattered shots which followed him. 

“Who was that?” whispered Peleg to Daniel 
Boone. 

“It was Henry.” 

“I believe it was,” declared Peleg excitedly. 
“What will he do now?” 

“He will give the alarm to the village. We are 
[ 296 ] 


CONCLUSION 


not more than a mile from it now, and he will be 
there long before our horses can carry us over such 
ground as we have had for the past few miles.” 

Just at that moment there was a sharp call for 
an advance. The entire body at once responded, 
although the hungry horses were in no condition 
for swift action. 

The words of the great scout were fulfilled when 
the force drew near the Indian village. Not one 
of its people was to be seen. Fires were still 
smouldering and even the meat which was being 
roasted and the corn that was boiling in the kettles 
had been abandoned in the precipitate flight of the 
Indians. 

The discovery of the food was perhaps more 
welcome to the hungry men than would have been 
the sight of their foes. At all events, a halt was 
made, and such food as could be obtained was 
speedily allotted. 

At the right of the village a large field of corn 
was seen, and the discovery that the corn was in the 
ear and ripe for food was good news indeed. It 
was not long before the hunger of every man was ap- 
peased, in a measure at least, and the entire force was 
ready for the further commands of Colonel Clark. 

The village was set on fire in several places, and 
flames were also kindled in the field. In less than 
an hour the men departed, leaving behind them 
[ 297 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

only the smoking embers of what a short time be- 
fore had been a prosperous village of the red men. 

Colonel Clark now urged his men forward with 
increasing speed. At times the force divided and 
the task of burning certain villages was assigned 
to the different bands. At other times the entire 
force proceeded as one body. But their enemies 
still had not been seen. Occasionally a solitary 
Indian would crawl within gunshot when the camp 
was pitched, discharge his gun, and then instantly 
flee; and once a small party of warriors, mounted 
upon superb horses, advanced boldly within gun- 
shot. The red men coolly surveyed the little 
army, but when a force was sent to attack them 
they rode away so swiftly that pursuit was useless. 

Village after village was burned to the ground, 
and rich fields of corn were left in ruins. The 
pioneers were determined to rid themselves once 
and for all of further possibilities of attacks by the 
ferocious Shawnees. 

The alarm over the advance of Colonel Clark 
had spread throughout the entire region, and with 
one accord the red men had abandoned their homes 
and fled into the wilderness beyond. 

When the attacking forces at last disbanded 
and the men returned to their homes, Daniel Boone 
and Peleg Barnes went back with their friends into 
Kentucky. The ^warfare with the Indians was ended. 
[2981 


CONCLUSION 


The Kentucky homes were now free from the at- 
tacks of the Shawnees or Cherokees. 

Peleg was no longer a boy. The years that had 
passed during these pioneer days had made of 
him a man. He now had his own home and a 
tract of land adjoining that of his great friend, 
Daniel Boone. 

Not a word was heard concerning Henry. There 
were occasional vague reports of the presence of a 
white man among the Shawnees, but whether or 
not this referred to “the white Shawnee” was 
never known. 

As for Daniel Boone, it seemed as if the days of 
his peril were ended. The region which he had 
opened up for the incoming people had now be- 
come well settled. The sound of the axe was 
heard more frequently than the rifle. Prosperity 
smiled upon the efforts of the sturdy settlers, and 
the steadily advancing civilization and the spread 
of education wrought wonders among the people. 

In the diary of Daniel Boone there occurs the 
following: 

“Two darling sons and a brother I have lost by savage 
hands which have also taken from me 40 valuable horses and 
abundance of cattle. Many dark and sleepless nights have 
I spent, separated from the cheerful society of man, scorched 
by the summer’s sun, and pinched by the winter’s cold, an 
instrument ordained to settle the wilderness.” 

[ 299 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 


Another writer has left the following: 

“He (Boone) has left behind him a name strongly written 
in the annals of Kentucky, and a reputation for calm courage 
softened by humanity, conducted by prudence, and embel- 
lished by a singular modesty of deportment. His person was 
rough, robust, and indicating strength rather than activity; 
his manner was cold, grave, and taciturn; his countenance 
homely but kind; his conversation unadorned, unobtrusive, 
and touching only upon the needful. He never spoke of 
himself unless particularly questioned.” 

As the years passed he showed more and more 
the spirit which has been described by one of his 
admirers in the following words: 

“There never beat in man a kindlier or more philanthropic 
heart. While he was a stranger to selfish and sordid impres- 
sions he was alike above mean actions; and he lived and 
toiled for others, amid hardships and sufferings that would 
have crushed thousands of hearts.” 

The simple-hearted scout, shrewd in his dealing 
with the Indians, was honest and straightforward 
with the men of his own race, and looked for similar 
treatment from them. One can therefore imag- 
ine his surprise and indignation when he was in- 
formed that he had no legal right to an acre of the 
land which he had discovered, and into which he 
had led many families that already were sharing 
in the steadily increasing prosperity. The clear- 
ing he had made, the acres he had cultivated, he 
[ 300 ] 


CONCLUSION 


was informed, were not his property now, but be- 
longed to a man who had signed certain papers ! 

Boone intensely loved Kentucky. Its rocks and 
trees, its rivers, its forests, its very soil, were dear 
to his heart. In Kentucky he had experienced 
his deepest sorrows and many of his highest joys. 
Perplexed as well as disheartened, the great scout 
departed from the settlement which in a large 
measure was his own work. He was homeless in a 
land in which he had helped so many to secure 
homes for themselves. 

Deep as was Boone’s sorrow, he was, as we 
know, a man whose feeling did not find expression 
in useless words. Quietly he returned to the banks 
of the Delaware where he had been born, and 
then went on to Virginia. On the borders of the 
great Kanawha he dwelt for five years in the woods 
with his dogs and gun. 

Meanwhile his son and a brother had gone out 
into the remote and almost unknown land beyond 
the Mississippi River. Their reports and appeals 
were so strong, that at last, when the great scout 
was sixty years of age, once more accompanied by 
his faithful wife, he journeyed away from civilization 
and went to join his sons in the faraway wilderness. 

The name of the great scout was so well-known 
and his character was so much admired that the 
Spanish Governor at once made him a present of 
[ 301 ] 


SCOUTING WITH DANIEL BOONE 

eighty-five hundred acres of land in what is now 
the State of Missouri. 

Here the great scout in a measure renewed the 
experiences of his early life. By working steadily 
and saving the money which he received from his 
crops and his furs he acquired a considerable sum. 
He then returned to Kentucky and looked up every 
man to whom he owed any money through the loss j 
that had come to him by his inability to retain his 
land in the region he had loved. It was not long, 
however, before “he went back to Missouri, his 
heart lighter and also his pocketbook.” 

When the scout was seventy-five years of age, 
he still was a great hunter. Friendly with the 
Indians in the region, he paddled in his light canoe ! 
over the creeks and the little streams in the new 
territory, and it is said that even along the banks 
of the great Missouri River he set many of his 
traps for the beaver. 

As long as the Spanish and French were in con- 
trol of the Missouri country, Boone continued to 
hold his land safely; but when Napoleon sold the 
vast territory to the United States Boone once 
more suffered a heavy loss, for his own government 
refused to recognize his claim to any part of the 
region. It seemed almost as if the closing days of 
the great scout were to end in darkness. 

Through his friends, Daniel Boone now appealed 
[ 302 ] 


CONCLUSION 


to the legislature of Kentucky to see that justice 
was done him. Eager to recognize the services 
of the man who had done so much for their state, 
the legislature urged Congress to do justice to the 
white-haired old scout. After some delay the peti- 
tion was granted, and a gift of eight hundred and 
fifty acres of land was voted Daniel Boone. 

It was in December, 1813, when Daniel Boone 
received word of this gift, but his relief and pleas- 
ure were lessened by the death of his wife. Select- 
ing a choice spot that overlooked the river for her 
grave, the old scout said that when he, too, should 
die he wished to be buried by her side. 

Seven years later, when he was eighty-five years 
old, this last request of Daniel Boone was granted. 

Missouri, however, was not to be the final resting- 
place of the famous old scout and his wife. A 
quarter of a century later the legislature of Ken- 
tucky requested the children of Boone to permit 
the people of the state for which he had done so 
much to bring the bodies of the great scout and his 
wife to Frankfort, Kentucky. 

To-day, on a beautiful site overlooking the 
banks of the Kentucky River, looking down upon 
the city of Frankfort, a fitting monument marks 
the place where all that is mortal of Daniel Boone 
lies resting. 

THE END 

303 




ft* 7 90 \<g 










2 
a 


.a a. 


•A 

X’* u> 

tf 

.*° ,,l 

8 4 

} V 


^ J&u. 

0yt2-> + 



• N c ‘ . . s'' A 1 

# '<• 0° 

v f 4§¥®a '. o x * 



—«* a> r ’ <K j * 

s-«, o* 

V V. S S ^ T /y > A V * 

V <* 4 y '■ 


-. 

c** 


* <-> o 

' * A ^ 

9J* 


^ '' '% " S' ^ “ -4 C*- * 

s j q . . •* A o, ^ 

■ P, * 4 V c« - C * -'o, 

^ - S ^’ i ‘ ' 



^ V* 



|J 

o> '•>, ' * • C> 

*'' # ■% '• ., „ o ’* .0° c o %,,V 

V '' V/« > .C* *'"°'.% V' 

* * v £fe\ ^ \. ^ 

° >=3I imiife=v. r 'X S «• Z ^ *V 

A ^ 

^ v? 


A % . 


A> 


5 > “ -i '* ^ A a' 

I. * A vD. X/ / ^ ^ s s \G <** y o * \ ’ -A 

■"‘■«Ao 0 A v*';* va,, a . 

- ° u * ef'n7??7-, * ^ A * 

M'/l 1 / *r 's^ <. 

*>* V ^ 'A -r ^V ^ 

* W-IS^n * <) ^ ^ 

* 




r£* ✓ <* 

*>. 'oho* > 
'/ x ,0 


■ 

s'* 

r\v * v 



<V -’Ovy'* A vO * ** , c s ,0* 

r O v n * * „ ,<^ c o N o ^ ^ ,iU. 

0 ' V ^ > O 0° v'lX l 

- ^ V* ° 

^ >oo, : 

* .0 n o ^ <o J °o -rf> * * ii o 

V X V S W*J*, > ^ * \® ' _ ^ ^ ° N °. 






<1 ' V 

° '*£’ <\> * 

° <£» ^ - 

c *>. 2 

" 4V % ® 


^ \ ' ^ - * 

> X .'“tV'"''/,.'". -Vf, 

^ ^ f> . V 1 <* 





V* 

v* V k 


* AV -/\ 

* , - ^ 
^ *o*i+ A j 

C 0 N c ♦ 

sr * ■< w « /■ ^o 

^ ^ V .V 



CL ^ Z 

o c W <C O 

v£\ ° *> *> - ur 

y o , x ^ A ^ .&* < * * 0 * X * A M ; A 

^ ^ x c° N0 « / '*o r o^ x * v, “« ^ 



& ' 

?: xo©,. , 

>°°* ' * . Sc. * •" * ' v ^ '••' ^ 4 ;r ° ’ >°; v . „ ;% '*••'*'. 

^ * a ^ ** <£+ . * 

.v * ^ ^ * ?; p 




*> 

'V '»■'' v 4 ° .VI 

- °o o 0 ' 

«/* 

s * 

1 *0 o' . 

o 5 ^ 

v fcT ^ > ^ 

\# .. V*-’'/ V.„ 

V . s \ ft ' jV ^ c 


<> 



* v\^‘ ^ 

•v ^ \K ^ » 

<• %r.^'*A ’ ^>/^ 

/ c» N ‘ V ^ 0 . 

% -V A r ' ° 

-c ^ K “ 




^ Oh ♦ 


^ or 

' * \ \^ X s s * «■ , ^ * 3 N 0 




